]> code.delx.au - gnu-emacs/blob - etc/NEWS
Convert subtables in Foldout mode into @itemize.
[gnu-emacs] / etc / NEWS
1 GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 2001-03-15
2 Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3 See the end for copying conditions.
4
5 Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
6 For older news, see the file ONEWS
7
8 \f
9 * Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
10
11 See the INSTALL file for information on installing extra libraries and
12 fonts to take advantage of the new graphical features and extra
13 charsets in this release.
14
15 ** Support for GNU/Linux on IA64 machines has been added.
16
17 ** Support for LynxOS has been added.
18
19 ** There are new configure options associated with the support for
20 images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option in `configure'
21 to list them.
22
23 ** You can build a 64-bit Emacs for SPARC/Solaris systems which
24 support 64-bit executables and also on Irix 6.5. This increases the
25 maximum buffer size. See etc/MACHINES for instructions. Changes to
26 build on other 64-bit systems should be straightforward modulo any
27 necessary changes to unexec.
28
29 ** There is a new configure option `--disable-largefile' to omit
30 Unix-98-style support for large files if that is available.
31
32 ** There is a new configure option `--without-xim' that instructs
33 Emacs to not use X Input Methods (XIM), if these are available.
34
35 ** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
36 the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
37
38 ** This version can be built for the Macintosh, but does not implement
39 all of the new display features described below. The port currently
40 lacks unexec, asynchronous processes, and networking support. See the
41 "Emacs and the Mac OS" appendix in the Emacs manual, for the
42 description of aspects specific to the Mac.
43
44 ** Note that the MS-Windows port does not yet implement various of the
45 new display features described below.
46
47 \f
48 * Changes in Emacs 21.1
49
50 +++
51 ** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
52
53 The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
54 Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
55 oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
56 of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
57 the text.
58
59 +++
60 ** Emacs has a new face implementation.
61
62 The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
63 font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
64 height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
65 These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
66 specify a font.
67
68 Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
69 These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
70 under Lisp changes, below.
71
72 +++
73 ** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
74
75 Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
76 Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
77 the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
78 italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
79 Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
80 attributes such as `overline', `strike-through', and `box' are ignored
81 on terminals.
82
83 The command-line options `-fg COLOR', `-bg COLOR', and `-rv' are now
84 supported on character terminals.
85
86 Emacs automatically remaps all X-style color specifications to one of
87 the colors supported by the terminal. This means you could have the
88 same color customizations that work both on a windowed display and on
89 a TTY or when Emacs is invoked with the -nw option.
90
91 ---
92 ** New default font is Courier 12pt under X.
93
94 ---
95 ** Sound support
96
97 Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and FreeBSD (Voxware
98 driver and native BSD driver, a.k.a. Luigi's driver). Currently
99 supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio (*.au).
100
101 +++
102 ** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
103
104 If a message is longer than one line, or minibuffer contents are
105 longer than one line, Emacs can resize the minibuffer window unless it
106 is on a frame of its own. You can control resizing and the maximum
107 minibuffer window size by setting the following variables:
108
109 - User option: max-mini-window-height
110
111 Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
112 fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
113 specifies a number of lines.
114
115 Default is 0.25.
116
117 - User option: resize-mini-windows
118
119 How to resize mini-windows. If nil, don't resize. If t, always
120 resize to fit the size of the text. If `grow-only', let mini-windows
121 grow only, until they become empty, at which point they are shrunk
122 again.
123
124 Default is `grow-only'.
125
126 +++
127 ** LessTif support.
128
129 Emacs now runs with the LessTif toolkit (see
130 <http://www.lesstif.org>). You will need version 0.92.26, or later.
131
132 +++
133 ** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
134
135 When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
136 from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
137 non-nil.
138
139 +++
140 ** Toolkit scroll bars.
141
142 Emacs now uses toolkit scroll bars if available. When configured for
143 LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scroll bar. Otherwise, when
144 configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
145 bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
146 bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
147 Emacs.
148
149 When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
150 Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
151 Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
152 Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
153 define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
154 `s/freebsd.h' as an example.
155
156 Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
157 a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
158 directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
159 different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
160 system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
161 add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
162
163 The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
164 `float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
165 This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
166 imake configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
167 Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
168
169 +++
170 ** Tool bar support.
171
172 Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
173 of how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level
174 changes. Tool-bar global minor mode controls whether or not it is
175 displayed and is on by default. The appearance of the bar is improved
176 if Emacs has been built with XPM image support. Otherwise monochrome
177 icons will be used.
178
179 To make the tool bar more useful, we need contributions of extra icons
180 for specific modes (with copyright assignments). Contributions would
181 also be useful to touch up some of the PBM icons manually.
182
183 +++
184 ** Tooltips.
185
186 Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
187 mouse position. The Lisp package `tooltip' implements them. You can
188 turn them off via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
189
190 Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
191 variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
192 the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
193 tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
194
195 +++
196 ** Automatic Hscrolling
197
198 Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if
199 `automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be
200 customized.
201
202 If a window is scrolled horizontally with set-window-hscroll, or
203 scroll-left/scroll-right (C-x <, C-x >), this serves as a lower bound
204 for automatic horizontal scrolling. Automatic scrolling will scroll
205 the text more to the left if necessary, but won't scroll the text more
206 to the right than the column set with set-window-hscroll etc.
207
208 +++
209 ** When using a windowing terminal, each Emacs window now has a cursor
210 of its own. By default, when a window is selected, the cursor is
211 solid; otherwise, it is hollow. The user-option
212 `cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to display the
213 cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is shown, if
214 non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown.
215
216 +++
217 ** Fringes to the left and right of windows are used to display
218 truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
219 foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
220 customizing face `fringe'.
221
222 +++
223 ** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default.
224 You can change its appearance by modifying the face `mode-line'.
225 In particular, setting the `:box' attribute to nil turns off the 3D
226 appearance of the mode line. (The 3D appearance makes the mode line
227 occupy more space, and thus might cause the first or the last line of
228 the window to be partially obscured.)
229
230 The variable `mode-line-inverse-video', which was used in older
231 versions of emacs to make the mode-line stand out, is now deprecated.
232 However, setting it to nil will cause the `mode-line' face to be
233 ignored, and mode-lines to be drawn using the default text face.
234
235 +++
236 ** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
237
238 Different parts of the mode line have been made mouse-sensitive on all
239 systems which support the mouse. Moving the mouse to a
240 mouse-sensitive part in the mode line changes the appearance of the
241 mouse pointer to an arrow, and help about available mouse actions is
242 displayed either in the echo area, or in the tooltip window if you
243 have enabled one.
244
245 Currently, the following actions have been defined:
246
247 - Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two
248 buffers.
249
250 - Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and
251 M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list.
252
253 - Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu.
254
255 - Mouse-2 on the read-only or modified status in the mode line (`%' or
256 `*') toggles the status.
257
258 - Mouse-3 on the mode name displays a minor-mode menu.
259
260 +++
261 ** Hourglass pointer
262
263 Emacs can optionally display an hourglass pointer under X. You can
264 turn the display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
265
266 +++
267 ** Blinking cursor
268
269 M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
270 terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
271 and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
272 the group `cursor'.
273
274 +++
275 ** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
276
277 This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
278 generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
279 See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
280 details.
281
282 Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
283 have to do anything to activate it.
284
285 +++
286 ** The default binding of the Delete key has changed.
287
288 The new user-option `normal-erase-is-backspace' can be set to
289 determine the effect of the Delete and Backspace function keys.
290
291 On window systems, the default value of this option is chosen
292 according to the keyboard used. If the keyboard has both a Backspace
293 key and a Delete key, and both are mapped to their usual meanings, the
294 option's default value is set to t, so that Backspace can be used to
295 delete backward, and Delete can be used to delete forward. On
296 keyboards which either have only one key (usually labeled DEL), or two
297 keys DEL and BS which produce the same effect, the option's value is
298 set to nil, and these keys delete backward.
299
300 If not running under a window system, setting this option accomplishes
301 a similar effect by mapping C-h, which is usually generated by the
302 Backspace key, to DEL, and by mapping DEL to C-d via
303 `keyboard-translate'. The former functionality of C-h is available on
304 the F1 key. You should probably not use this setting on a text-only
305 terminal if you don't have both Backspace, Delete and F1 keys.
306
307 Programmatically, you can call function normal-erase-is-backspace-mode
308 to toggle the behavior of the Delete and Backspace keys.
309
310 +++
311 ** The default for user-option `next-line-add-newlines' has been
312 changed to nil, i.e. C-n will no longer add newlines at the end of a
313 buffer by default.
314
315 ---
316 ** The <home> and <end> keys now move to the beginning or end of the
317 current line, respectively. C-<home> and C-<end> move to the
318 beginning and end of the buffer.
319
320 ---
321 ** Emacs now checks for recursive loads of Lisp files. If the
322 recursion depth exceeds `recursive-load-depth-limit', an error is
323 signaled.
324
325 +++
326 ** When an error is signaled during the loading of the user's init
327 file, Emacs now pops up the *Messages* buffer.
328
329 +++
330 ** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't
331 compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change
332 this behavior.
333
334 The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs's byte
335 compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let
336 Emacs dump core.
337
338 ---
339 ** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
340
341 When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
342 widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
343 Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
344
345 ---
346 ** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
347 more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
348 now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
349
350 ---
351 ** Item Save Options on the Options menu allows saving options set
352 using that menu.
353
354 +++
355 ** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
356
357 When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
358 whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
359 defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
360 highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
361 displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
362 whitespace.
363
364 +++
365 ** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
366 all frames except the selected one.
367
368 +++
369 ** The new user-option `confirm-kill-emacs' can be customized to
370 let Emacs ask for confirmation before exiting.
371
372 +++
373 ** The header line in an Info buffer is now displayed as an emacs
374 header-line (which is like a mode-line, but at the top of the window),
375 so that it remains visible even when the buffer has been scrolled.
376 This behavior may be disabled by customizing the option
377 `Info-use-header-line'.
378
379 ---
380 ** Polish, Czech, German, and French translations of Emacs' reference card
381 have been added. They are named `pl-refcard.tex', `cs-refcard.tex',
382 `de-refcard.tex' and `fr-refcard.tex'. Postscript files are included.
383
384 ---
385 ** An `Emacs Survival Guide', etc/survival.tex, is available.
386
387 ---
388 ** A reference card for Dired has been added. Its name is
389 `dired-ref.tex'. A French translation is available in
390 `fr-drdref.tex'.
391
392 +++
393 ** C-down-mouse-3 is bound differently. Now if the menu bar is not
394 displayed it pops up a menu containing the items which would be on the
395 menu bar. If the menu bar is displayed, it pops up the major mode
396 menu or the Edit menu if there is no major mode menu.
397
398 ---
399 ** Variable `load-path' is no longer customizable through Customize.
400
401 You can no longer use `M-x customize-variable' to customize `load-path'
402 because it now contains a version-dependent component. You can still
403 use `add-to-list' and `setq' to customize this variable in your
404 `~/.emacs' init file or to modify it from any Lisp program in general.
405
406 +++
407 ** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at
408 point in a pop-up window.
409
410 +++
411 ** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
412 under XFree86. To enable this, use the `mouse-wheel-mode' command, or
413 customize the variable `mouse-wheel-mode'.
414
415 The variables `mouse-wheel-follow-mouse' and `mouse-wheel-scroll-amount'
416 determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
417
418 +++
419 ** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a
420 sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory.
421 (On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.)
422 You can customize `auto-save-list-file-prefix' to change this location.
423
424 +++
425 ** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively.
426
427 +++
428 ** The new user-option `even-window-heights' can be set to nil
429 to prevent `display-buffer' from evening out window heights.
430
431 +++
432 ** The new command M-x delete-trailing-whitespace RET will delete the
433 trailing whitespace within the current restriction. You can also add
434 this function to `write-file-hooks' or `local-write-file-hooks'.
435
436 ---
437 ** When visiting a file with M-x find-file-literally, no newlines will
438 be added to the end of the buffer even if `require-final-newline' is
439 non-nil.
440
441 +++
442 ** The new user-option `find-file-suppress-same-file-warnings' can be
443 set to suppress warnings ``X and Y are the same file'' when visiting a
444 file that is already visited under a different name.
445
446 ---
447 ** The new user-option `electric-help-shrink-window' can be set to
448 nil to prevent adjusting the help window size to the buffer size.
449
450 +++
451 ** New command M-x describe-character-set reads a character set name
452 and displays information about that.
453
454 ---
455 ** The new variable `auto-mode-interpreter-regexp' contains a regular
456 expression matching interpreters, for file mode determination.
457
458 This regular expression is matched against the first line of a file to
459 determine the file's mode in `set-auto-mode' when Emacs can't deduce a
460 mode from the file's name. If it matches, the file is assumed to be
461 interpreted by the interpreter matched by the second group of the
462 regular expression. The mode is then determined as the mode
463 associated with that interpreter in `interpreter-mode-alist'.
464
465 ---
466 ** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is
467 suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to `executable-chmod'.
468
469 +++
470 ** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if
471 buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer
472 contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or
473 by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and
474 insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment,
475 the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding.
476 Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system.
477
478 ---
479 ** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have
480 been removed -- use `set-language-environment'.
481
482 +++
483 ** The new Custom option `keyboard-coding-system' specifies a coding
484 system for keyboard input.
485
486 +++
487 ** New variable `inhibit-iso-escape-detection' determines if Emacs'
488 coding system detection algorithm should pay attention to ISO2022's
489 escape sequences. If this variable is non-nil, the algorithm ignores
490 such escape sequences. The default value is nil, and it is
491 recommended not to change it except for the special case that you
492 always want to read any escape code verbatim. If you just want to
493 read a specific file without decoding escape codes, use C-x RET c
494 (`universal-coding-system-argument'). For instance, C-x RET c latin-1
495 RET C-x C-f filename RET.
496
497 ---
498 ** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the
499 environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'.
500
501 +++
502 ** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and
503 displays all characters in that character set.
504
505 ---
506 ** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based
507 coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8.
508
509 +++
510 ** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
511 and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
512 LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
513
514 +++
515 ** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
516 Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets
517 8859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign).
518 GNU Intlfonts doesn't support these yet but recent X releases have
519 8859-15. See etc/INSTALL for information on obtaining extra fonts.
520 There are new Leim input methods for Latin-8 and Latin-9 prefix (only)
521 and Polish `slash'.
522
523 +++
524 ** New language environments `Dutch' and `Spanish'.
525 These new environments mainly select appropriate translations
526 of the tutorial.
527
528 ---
529 ** In Ethiopic language environment, special key bindings for
530 function keys are changed as follows. This is to conform to "Emacs
531 Lisp Coding Convention".
532
533 new command old-binding
534 --- ------- -----------
535 f3 ethio-fidel-to-sera-buffer f5
536 S-f3 ethio-fidel-to-sera-region f5
537 C-f3 ethio-fidel-to-sera-mail-or-marker f5
538
539 f4 ethio-sera-to-fidel-buffer unchanged
540 S-f4 ethio-sera-to-fidel-region unchanged
541 C-f4 ethio-sera-to-fidel-mail-or-marker unchanged
542
543 S-f5 ethio-toggle-punctuation f3
544 S-f6 ethio-modify-vowel f6
545 S-f7 ethio-replace-space f7
546 S-f8 ethio-input-special-character f8
547 S-f9 ethio-replace-space unchanged
548 C-f9 ethio-toggle-space f2
549
550 ---
551 ** The rule of input method "slovak" is slightly changed. Now the
552 rules for translating "q" and "Q" to "`" (backquote) are deleted, thus
553 typing them inserts "q" and "Q" respectively. Rules for translating
554 "=q", "+q", "=Q", and "+Q" to "`" are also deleted. Now, to input
555 "`", you must type "=q".
556
557 +++
558 ** When your terminal can't display characters from some of the ISO
559 8859 character sets but can display Latin-1, you can display
560 more-or-less mnemonic sequences of ASCII/Latin-1 characters instead of
561 empty boxes (under a window system) or question marks (not under a
562 window system). Customize the option `latin1-display' to turn this
563 on.
564
565 +++
566 ** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based
567 on the context. M-x kill-comment is now an alias to comment-kill,
568 defined in newcomment.el. You can choose different styles of region
569 commenting with the variable `comment-style'.
570
571 +++
572 ** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and
573 `display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail
574 indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the
575 indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive.
576
577 +++
578 ** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines
579 on the display using several methods
580
581 +++
582 - By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be
583 a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should
584 be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames.
585
586 +++
587 - By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is
588 equivalent to specifying the frame parameter.
589
590 - By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line.
591
592 - By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is
593 the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only.
594
595 +++
596 ** The new command `clone-indirect-buffer' can be used to create
597 an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The
598 command `clone-indirect-buffer-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c,
599 does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window.
600
601 +++
602 ** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and
603 `make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups,
604 typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory.
605
606 ---
607 ** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1
608 characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities.
609
610 +++
611 ** New X resources recognized
612
613 *** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies
614 whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode
615 is useful for debugging X problems.
616
617 Example:
618
619 emacs.synchronous: true
620
621 *** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
622 visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
623 the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
624 and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
625 visual class names are
626
627 TrueColor
628 PseudoColor
629 DirectColor
630 StaticColor
631 GrayScale
632 StaticGray
633
634 Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
635 `pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
636 meaning.
637
638 The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
639 supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
640 `visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
641 visual.
642
643 Example:
644
645 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
646
647 *** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
648 specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
649 default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
650 resource values are `true' or `on'.
651
652 Example:
653
654 emacs.privateColormap: true
655
656 +++
657 ** Faces and frame parameters.
658
659 There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
660 Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
661 `scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
662 `scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
663 sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
664 for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
665 parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
666
667 Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
668 `default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
669 `foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
670 `default' face and vice versa.
671
672 +++
673 ** New face `menu'.
674
675 The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
676
677 +++
678 ** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
679
680 The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
681 colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
682 correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
683 the screen gamma of a frame's display.
684
685 PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
686 in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
687 color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
688
689 The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
690 `ScreenGamma'.
691
692 ---
693 ** Tabs and variable-width text.
694
695 Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
696 defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
697 independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
698 Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
699
700 ** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
701
702 +++
703 *** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
704
705 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
706
707 The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the
708 LessTif/Motif one.
709
710 *** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in
711 LessTif and Motif.
712
713 +++
714 ** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
715
716 As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
717 drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
718 `x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
719
720 +++
721 ** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
722 bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi and Less).
723
724 This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
725 `indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
726 variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
727
728 +++
729 ** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
730
731 When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
732 value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggressively' is a
733 number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
734 fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
735
736 When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
737 value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggressively' is a
738 number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
739 fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
740
741 +++
742 ** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either
743 M-x clone-buffer, C-u m <entry> RET or C-u g <entry> RET.
744 M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and several other special
745 buffers.
746
747 ---
748 ** The command `Info-search' now uses a search history.
749
750 ---
751 ** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
752 abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
753 `directory-abbrev-alist'.
754
755 +++
756 ** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
757 the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
758 forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
759 value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
760 users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
761 even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
762
763 The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
764
765 ---
766 ** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
767 notably at the end of lines.
768
769 All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
770 spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
771
772 +++
773 ** The function `replace-rectangle' is an alias for `string-rectangle'.
774
775 +++
776 ** The new command M-x string-insert-rectangle is like `string-rectangle',
777 but inserts text instead of replacing it.
778
779 ---
780 ** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
781 query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
782 after each match to get the replacement text.
783
784 +++
785 ** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `e' (or `E') that lets
786 you edit the replacement string.
787
788 ---
789 ** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB'
790 (if you load the library `mailabbrev'), lets you complete mail aliases
791 in the text, analogous to lisp-complete-symbol.
792
793 +++
794 ** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
795
796 ---
797 ** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
798 to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
799
800 ---
801 ** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
802 the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X, on MS-Windows, and
803 MS-DOS, either in the echo area or with tooltips. Many standard menus
804 displayed by Emacs now have help strings.
805
806 --
807 ** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
808 read mail from the menu etc.
809
810 +++
811 ** The environment variable `EMACSLOCKDIR' is no longer used on MS-Windows.
812 This environment variable was used when creating lock files. Emacs on
813 MS-Windows does not use this variable anymore. This change was made
814 before Emacs 21.1, but wasn't documented until now.
815
816 +++
817 ** Highlighting of mouse-sensitive regions is now supported in the
818 MS-DOS version of Emacs.
819
820 +++
821 ** The new command `msdos-set-mouse-buttons' forces the MS-DOS version
822 of Emacs to behave as if the mouse had a specified number of buttons.
823 This comes handy with mice that don't report their number of buttons
824 correctly. One example is the wheeled mice, which report 3 buttons,
825 but clicks on the middle button are not passed to the MS-DOS version
826 of Emacs.
827
828 +++
829 ** Customize changes
830
831 *** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
832 `State' menu to add comments, or give a prefix argument to
833 M-x customize-set-variable or M-x customize-set-value. Note that
834 customization comments will cause the customizations to fail in
835 earlier versions of Emacs.
836
837 *** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
838 Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
839 default).
840
841 *** If Emacs was invoked with the `-q' or `--no-init-file' options, it
842 does not allow you to save customizations in your `~/.emacs' init
843 file. This is because saving customizations from such a session would
844 wipe out all the other customizationss you might have on your init
845 file.
846
847 ** New features in evaluation commands
848
849 +++
850 *** The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
851 modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
852 print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the new
853 customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
854 eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
855
856 The default values for the first two of these variables are 12 and 4
857 respectively, which means that `eval-expression' now prints at most
858 the first 12 members of a list and at most 4 nesting levels deep (if
859 the list is longer or deeper than that, an ellipsis `...' is
860 printed).
861
862 <RET> or <mouse-2> on the printed text toggles between an abbreviated
863 printed representation and an unabbreviated one.
864
865 The default value of eval-expression-debug-on-error is t, so any error
866 during evaluation produces a backtrace.
867
868 ---
869 *** The function `eval-defun' (M-C-x) now loads Edebug and instruments
870 code when called with a prefix argument.
871
872 +++
873 ** CC mode changes.
874
875 Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
876 current user setups (although it's believed that these
877 incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
878 However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
879 back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
880 compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
881 release.
882
883 *** The hardcoded switch to "java" style in Java mode is gone.
884 CC Mode used to automatically set the style to "java" when Java mode
885 is entered. This has now been removed since it caused too much
886 confusion.
887
888 However, to keep backward compatibility to a certain extent, the
889 default value for c-default-style now specifies the "java" style for
890 java-mode, but "gnu" for all other modes (as before). So you won't
891 notice the change if you haven't touched that variable.
892
893 *** New cleanups, space-before-funcall and compact-empty-funcall.
894 Two new cleanups have been added to c-cleanup-list:
895
896 space-before-funcall causes a space to be inserted before the opening
897 parenthesis of a function call, which gives the style "foo (bar)".
898
899 compact-empty-funcall causes any space before a function call opening
900 parenthesis to be removed if there are no arguments to the function.
901 It's typically useful together with space-before-funcall to get the
902 style "foo (bar)" and "foo()".
903
904 *** Some keywords now automatically trigger reindentation.
905 Keywords like "else", "while", "catch" and "finally" have been made
906 "electric" to make them reindent automatically when they continue an
907 earlier statement. An example:
908
909 for (i = 0; i < 17; i++)
910 if (a[i])
911 res += a[i]->offset;
912 else
913
914 Here, the "else" should be indented like the preceding "if", since it
915 continues that statement. CC Mode will automatically reindent it after
916 the "else" has been typed in full, since it's not until then it's
917 possible to decide whether it's a new statement or a continuation of
918 the preceding "if".
919
920 CC Mode uses Abbrev mode to achieve this, which is therefore turned on
921 by default.
922
923 *** M-a and M-e now moves by sentence in multiline strings.
924 Previously these two keys only moved by sentence in comments, which
925 meant that sentence movement didn't work in strings containing
926 documentation or other natural language text.
927
928 The reason it's only activated in multiline strings (i.e. strings that
929 contain a newline, even when escaped by a '\') is to avoid stopping in
930 the short strings that often reside inside statements. Multiline
931 strings almost always contain text in a natural language, as opposed
932 to other strings that typically contain format specifications,
933 commands, etc. Also, it's not that bothersome that M-a and M-e misses
934 sentences in single line strings, since they're short anyway.
935
936 *** Support for autodoc comments in Pike mode.
937 Autodoc comments for Pike are used to extract documentation from the
938 source, like Javadoc in Java. Pike mode now recognize this markup in
939 comment prefixes and paragraph starts.
940
941 *** The comment prefix regexps on c-comment-prefix may be mode specific.
942 When c-comment-prefix is an association list, it specifies the comment
943 line prefix on a per-mode basis, like c-default-style does. This
944 change came about to support the special autodoc comment prefix in
945 Pike mode only.
946
947 *** Better handling of syntactic errors.
948 The recovery after unbalanced parens earlier in the buffer has been
949 improved; CC Mode now reports them by dinging and giving a message
950 stating the offending line, but still recovers and indent the
951 following lines in a sane way (most of the time). An "else" with no
952 matching "if" is handled similarly. If an error is discovered while
953 indenting a region, the whole region is still indented and the error
954 is reported afterwards.
955
956 *** Lineup functions may now return absolute columns.
957 A lineup function can give an absolute column to indent the line to by
958 returning a vector with the desired column as the first element.
959
960 *** More robust and warning-free byte compilation.
961 Although this is strictly not a user visible change (well, depending
962 on the view of a user), it's still worth mentioning that CC Mode now
963 can be compiled in the standard ways without causing trouble. Some
964 code have also been moved between the subpackages to enhance the
965 modularity somewhat. Thanks to Martin Buchholz for doing the
966 groundwork.
967
968 *** c-style-variables-are-local-p now defaults to t.
969 This is an incompatible change that has been made to make the behavior
970 of the style system wrt global variable settings less confusing for
971 non-advanced users. If you know what this variable does you might
972 want to set it to nil in your .emacs, otherwise you probably don't
973 have to bother.
974
975 Defaulting c-style-variables-are-local-p to t avoids the confusing
976 situation that occurs when a user sets some style variables globally
977 and edits both a Java and a non-Java file in the same Emacs session.
978 If the style variables aren't buffer local in this case, loading of
979 the second file will cause the default style (either "gnu" or "java"
980 by default) to override the global settings made by the user.
981
982 *** New initialization procedure for the style system.
983 When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
984 variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
985 take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
986 is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
987 settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
988 possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
989 Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
990
991 By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
992 special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
993 the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
994 of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
995 above.
996
997 Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
998 when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
999 function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
1000 call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
1001 then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
1002 values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
1003 only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
1004 function documentation for more info.
1005
1006 The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
1007 especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
1008 with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
1009 intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
1010 such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
1011 is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
1012 configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
1013 global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
1014
1015 (Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
1016
1017 **** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
1018 This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
1019
1020 This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
1021 variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
1022 completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
1023 the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
1024 empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
1025 style system.
1026
1027 **** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
1028 In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
1029 c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
1030 as far as possible.
1031
1032 *** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
1033 CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
1034 surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
1035 chapter about this in the manual.
1036
1037 **** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
1038 The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
1039 recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
1040 primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
1041 adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
1042
1043 **** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
1044 This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
1045 c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
1046
1047 **** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
1048 This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
1049
1050 It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
1051 Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
1052 A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
1053 inside CC Mode.
1054
1055 Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
1056 causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
1057 the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
1058 available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
1059 cc-mode/).
1060
1061 **** The variables `c-hanging-comment-starter-p' and
1062 `c-hanging-comment-ender-p', which controlled how comment starters and
1063 enders were filled, are not used anymore. The new version of the
1064 function `c-fill-paragraph' keeps the comment starters and enders as
1065 they were before the filling.
1066
1067 **** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
1068 The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
1069 specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
1070 literals.
1071
1072 **** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
1073 It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
1074 prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
1075 you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
1076 this function.
1077
1078 *** Fixes to IDL mode.
1079 It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
1080 to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
1081 struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
1082 Thanks to Eric Eide.
1083
1084 *** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
1085 It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
1086 opening braces hangs and when they don't.
1087
1088 **** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
1089
1090 *** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
1091 See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
1092 better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
1093 and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
1094
1095 *** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
1096 previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
1097 the column specified by comment-column.
1098
1099 *** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
1100 In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
1101 is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
1102 prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
1103 contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
1104 don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
1105
1106 *** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
1107 instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
1108 arguments.
1109
1110 *** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
1111
1112 *** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
1113 c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
1114 c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
1115 variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
1116 Provan).
1117
1118 *** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
1119
1120 ** Dired changes
1121
1122 +++
1123 *** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
1124 command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
1125 is, delete only empty directories.
1126
1127 +++
1128 *** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
1129 command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
1130 copy directories recursively.
1131
1132 +++
1133 *** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
1134 in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
1135 the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
1136
1137 +++
1138 *** The new command `dired-find-alternate-file' (usually bound to `a')
1139 replaces the Dired buffer with the buffer for an alternate file or
1140 directory.
1141
1142 ---
1143 *** The new command `dired-show-file-type' (usually bound to `w') shows
1144 a message in the echo area describing what type of file the point is on.
1145 This command invokes the external program `file' do its work, and so
1146 will only work on systems with that program, and will be only as
1147 accurate or inaccurate as it is.
1148
1149 ---
1150 *** Dired now properly handles undo changes of adding/removing `-R'
1151 from ls switches.
1152
1153 ---
1154 *** Dired commands that prompt for a destination file now allow the use
1155 of the `M-n' command in the minibuffer to insert the source filename,
1156 which the user can then edit. This only works if there is a single
1157 source file, not when operating on multiple marked files.
1158
1159 +++
1160 ** Gnus changes.
1161
1162 The Gnus NEWS entries are short, but they reflect sweeping changes in
1163 four areas: Article display treatment, MIME treatment,
1164 internationalization and mail-fetching.
1165
1166 *** The mail-fetching functions have changed. See the manual for the
1167 many details. In particular, all procmail fetching variables are gone.
1168
1169 If you used procmail like in
1170
1171 (setq nnmail-use-procmail t)
1172 (setq nnmail-spool-file 'procmail)
1173 (setq nnmail-procmail-directory "~/mail/incoming/")
1174 (setq nnmail-procmail-suffix "\\.in")
1175
1176 this now has changed to
1177
1178 (setq mail-sources
1179 '((directory :path "~/mail/incoming/"
1180 :suffix ".in")))
1181
1182 More information is available in the info doc at Select Methods ->
1183 Getting Mail -> Mail Sources
1184
1185 *** Gnus is now a MIME-capable reader. This affects many parts of
1186 Gnus, and adds a slew of new commands. See the manual for details.
1187 Separate MIME packages like RMIME, mime-compose etc., will probably no
1188 longer work; remove them and use the native facilities.
1189
1190 The FLIM/SEMI package still works with Emacs 21, but if you want to
1191 use the native facilities, you must remove any mailcap.el[c] that was
1192 installed by FLIM/SEMI version 1.13 or earlier.
1193
1194 *** Gnus has also been multilingualized. This also affects too many
1195 parts of Gnus to summarize here, and adds many new variables. There
1196 are built-in facilities equivalent to those of gnus-mule.el, which is
1197 now just a compatibility layer.
1198
1199 *** gnus-mule.el is now just a compatibility layer over the built-in
1200 Gnus facilities.
1201
1202 *** gnus-auto-select-first can now be a function to be
1203 called to position point.
1204
1205 *** The user can now decide which extra headers should be included in
1206 summary buffers and NOV files.
1207
1208 *** `gnus-article-display-hook' has been removed. Instead, a number
1209 of variables starting with `gnus-treat-' have been added.
1210
1211 *** The Gnus posting styles have been redone again and now work in a
1212 subtly different manner.
1213
1214 *** New web-based backends have been added: nnslashdot, nnwarchive
1215 and nnultimate. nnweb has been revamped, again, to keep up with
1216 ever-changing layouts.
1217
1218 *** Gnus can now read IMAP mail via nnimap.
1219
1220 *** There is image support of various kinds and some sound support.
1221
1222 ---
1223 ** Changes in Texinfo mode.
1224
1225 *** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo
1226 macros
1227
1228 Key binding Macro
1229 -------------------------
1230 C-c C-c C-s @strong
1231 C-c C-c C-e @emph
1232 C-c C-c u @uref
1233 C-c C-c q @quotation
1234 C-c C-c m @email
1235 C-c C-o @<block> ... @end <block>
1236 M-RET @item
1237
1238 *** The " key now inserts either " or `` or '' depending on context.
1239
1240 ---
1241 ** Changes in Outline mode.
1242
1243 There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
1244 `outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
1245 the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
1246
1247 ** Changes to Emacs Server
1248
1249 +++
1250 *** The new option `server-kill-new-buffers' specifies what to do
1251 with buffers when done with them. If non-nil, the default, buffers
1252 are killed, unless they were already present before visiting them with
1253 Emacs Server. If nil, `server-temp-file-regexp' specifies which
1254 buffers to kill, as before.
1255
1256 Please note that only buffers are killed that still have a client,
1257 i.e. buffers visited with `emacsclient --no-wait' are never killed in
1258 this way.
1259
1260 +++
1261 ** Both emacsclient and Emacs itself now accept command line options
1262 of the form +LINE:COLUMN in addition to +LINE.
1263
1264 ---
1265 ** Changes to Show Paren mode.
1266
1267 *** Overlays used by Show Paren mode now use a priority property.
1268 The new user option show-paren-priority specifies the priority to
1269 use. Default is 1000.
1270
1271 +++
1272 ** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
1273 groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
1274
1275 ** Changes to hideshow.el
1276
1277 ---
1278 *** Generalized block selection and traversal
1279
1280 A block is now recognized by its start and end regexps (both strings),
1281 and an integer specifying which sub-expression in the start regexp
1282 serves as the place where a `forward-sexp'-like function can operate.
1283 See the documentation of variable `hs-special-modes-alist'.
1284
1285 ---
1286 *** During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active,
1287 hidden blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' can
1288 be used in the mode line format to show the line at the beginning of
1289 the open block.
1290
1291 ---
1292 *** User option `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' specifies a
1293 function to be called at each top-level block beginning, instead of
1294 the normal block-hiding function.
1295
1296 ---
1297 *** The command `hs-show-region' has been removed.
1298
1299 +++
1300 *** The key bindings have changed to fit the Emacs conventions,
1301 roughly imitating those of Outline minor mode. Notably, the prefix
1302 for all bindings is now `C-c @'. For details, see the documentation
1303 for `hs-minor-mode'.
1304
1305 ---
1306 *** The variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' has been removed, and
1307 hideshow.el now always behaves as if this variable were set to t.
1308
1309 ** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
1310
1311 +++
1312 *** If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes
1313 an entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
1314 log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
1315
1316 +++
1317 **** New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the
1318 current buffer.
1319
1320 +++
1321 *** New command M-x change-log-redate fixes any old-style date entries
1322 in a log file.
1323
1324 +++
1325 *** Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log
1326 entries if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
1327 Unless the file is under version control the search for a file's
1328 version number is performed based on regular expressions from
1329 `change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be customized.
1330 Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of a file.
1331
1332 *** Change Log mode now defines its own faces for font-lock highlighting.
1333
1334 ---
1335 ** Changes to cmuscheme
1336
1337 *** The user-option `scheme-program-name' has been renamed
1338 `cmuscheme-program-name' due to conflicts with xscheme.el.
1339
1340 ** Changes in Font Lock
1341
1342 +++
1343 *** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
1344 font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major mode.
1345
1346 ---
1347 *** Multi-line patterns are now supported. Modes using this, should
1348 set font-lock-multiline to t in their font-lock-defaults.
1349
1350 ---
1351 *** `font-lock-syntactic-face-function' allows major-modes to choose
1352 the face used for each string/comment.
1353
1354 ---
1355 *** A new standard face `font-lock-doc-face'.
1356 Meant for Lisp docstrings, Javadoc comments and other "documentation in code".
1357
1358 ** Changes to Shell mode
1359
1360 +++
1361 *** The `shell' command now accepts an optional argument to specify the buffer
1362 to use, which defaults to "*shell*". When used interactively, a
1363 non-default buffer may be specified by giving the `shell' command a
1364 prefix argument (causing it to prompt for the buffer name).
1365
1366 ** Comint (subshell) changes
1367
1368 These changes generally affect all modes derived from comint mode, which
1369 include shell-mode, gdb-mode, scheme-interaction-mode, etc.
1370
1371 ---
1372 *** Comint now by default interprets some carriage-control characters.
1373 Comint now removes CRs from CR LF sequences, and treats single CRs and
1374 BSs in the output in a way similar to a terminal (by deleting to the
1375 beginning of the line, or deleting the previous character,
1376 respectively). This is achieved by adding `comint-carriage-motion' to
1377 the `comint-output-filter-functions' hook by default.
1378
1379 +++
1380 *** By default, comint no longer uses the variable `comint-prompt-regexp'
1381 to distinguish prompts from user-input. Instead, it notices which
1382 parts of the text were output by the process, and which entered by the
1383 user, and attaches `field' properties to allow emacs commands to use
1384 this information. Common movement commands, notably beginning-of-line,
1385 respect field boundaries in a fairly natural manner. To disable this
1386 feature, and use the old behavior, customize the user option
1387 `comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields'.
1388
1389 +++
1390 *** Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
1391 and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
1392
1393 ---
1394 *** The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
1395 buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
1396 buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
1397
1398 The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
1399 M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
1400 the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
1401
1402 +++
1403 *** Packages based on comint now highlight user input and program prompts,
1404 and support choosing previous input with mouse-2. To control these features,
1405 see the user-options `comint-highlight-input' and `comint-highlight-prompt'.
1406
1407 +++
1408 *** The new command `comint-write-output' (usually bound to `C-c C-s')
1409 saves the output from the most recent command to a file. With a prefix
1410 argument, it appends to the file.
1411
1412 +++
1413 *** The command `comint-kill-output' has been renamed `comint-delete-output'
1414 (usually bound to `C-c C-o'); the old name is aliased to it for
1415 compatibility.
1416
1417 ---
1418 *** The new function `comint-add-to-input-history' adds commands to the input
1419 ring (history).
1420
1421 ---
1422 *** The new variable `comint-input-history-ignore' is a regexp for
1423 identifying history lines that should be ignored, like tcsh time-stamp
1424 strings, starting with a `#'. The default value of this variable is "^#".
1425
1426 ** Changes to Rmail mode
1427
1428 ---
1429 *** The new user-option rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be
1430 set to fine tune the identification of the correspondent when
1431 receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the
1432 recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default,
1433 `user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself
1434 as correspondent.
1435
1436 Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect
1437 mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a
1438 regexp matching your mail addresses.
1439
1440 ---
1441 *** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how
1442 to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an
1443 Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation
1444 with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask
1445 for confirmation with yes-or-no-p.
1446
1447 ---
1448 *** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
1449 like `j'.
1450
1451 ---
1452 *** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
1453 specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
1454 digest message.
1455
1456 ---
1457 *** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies
1458 in which folder to put messages automatically.
1459
1460 +++
1461 *** The new function `rmail-redecode-body' allows to fix a message
1462 with non-ASCII characters if Emacs happens to decode it incorrectly
1463 due to missing or malformed "charset=" header.
1464
1465 ---
1466 ** The new user-option `mail-envelope-from' can be used to specify
1467 an envelope-from address different from user-mail-address.
1468
1469 ---
1470 ** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
1471 use the -f option when sending mail.
1472
1473 ---
1474 ** Changes to TeX mode
1475
1476 *** The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
1477 `latex-mode'.
1478
1479 *** latex-mode now has a simple indentation algorithm.
1480
1481 *** M-f and M-p jump around \begin...\end pairs.
1482
1483 *** Added support for outline-minor-mode.
1484
1485 ** Changes to RefTeX mode
1486
1487 *** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
1488 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
1489 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
1490 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
1491 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
1492 can be edited from that buffer.
1493
1494 *** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
1495 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
1496 `A' to use all marked entries).
1497
1498 *** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
1499 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
1500
1501 *** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
1502 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
1503 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
1504 been cited.
1505
1506 ** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
1507 The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
1508 semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
1509 in column 1 are always made leaves.
1510
1511 ** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
1512 has the following new features:
1513
1514 *** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
1515 may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
1516 to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
1517 time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
1518
1519 *** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
1520 feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
1521 file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
1522 compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
1523 pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
1524 defaults to 1.
1525
1526 ** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in
1527 file names.
1528
1529 ** Ispell changes
1530
1531 +++
1532 *** The command `ispell' now spell-checks a region if
1533 transient-mark-mode is on, and the mark is active. Otherwise it
1534 spell-checks the current buffer.
1535
1536 +++
1537 *** Support for synchronous subprocesses - DOS/Windoze - has been
1538 added.
1539
1540 ---
1541 *** An "alignment error" bug was fixed when a manual spelling
1542 correction is made and re-checked.
1543
1544 ---
1545 *** An Italian, Portuguese, and Slovak dictionary definition has been added.
1546
1547 ---
1548 *** Region skipping performance has been vastly improved in some
1549 cases.
1550
1551 ---
1552 *** Spell checking HTML buffers has been improved and isn't so strict
1553 on syntax errors.
1554
1555 ---
1556 *** The buffer-local words are now always placed on a new line at the
1557 end of the buffer.
1558
1559 ---
1560 *** Spell checking now works in the MS-DOS version of Emacs.
1561
1562 ** Makefile mode changes
1563
1564 ---
1565 *** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'.
1566
1567 ---
1568 *** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when
1569 Fontlock mode is active.
1570
1571 ** Isearch changes
1572
1573 ---
1574 *** Isearch now puts a call to `isearch-resume' in the command history,
1575 so that searches can be resumed.
1576
1577 ---
1578 *** In Isearch mode, M-C-s and M-C-r are now bound like C-s and C-r,
1579 respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys
1580 that started the search.
1581
1582 ---
1583 *** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
1584 selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
1585
1586 +++
1587 *** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
1588
1589 Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
1590 `isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
1591 search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
1592 before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
1593 highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
1594 `secondary-selection'.
1595
1596 The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
1597 will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
1598 Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
1599 using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
1600 usual snappy response.
1601
1602 If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
1603 matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
1604 set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
1605 isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
1606
1607 ** VC Changes
1608
1609 VC has been overhauled internally. It is now modular, making it
1610 easier to plug-in arbitrary version control backends. (See Lisp
1611 Changes for details on the new structure.) As a result, the mechanism
1612 to enable and disable support for particular version systems has
1613 changed: everything is now controlled by the new variable
1614 `vc-handled-backends'. Its value is a list of symbols that identify
1615 version systems; the default is '(RCS CVS SCCS). When finding a file,
1616 each of the backends in that list is tried in order to see whether the
1617 file is registered in that backend.
1618
1619 When registering a new file, VC first tries each of the listed
1620 backends to see if any of them considers itself "responsible" for the
1621 directory of the file (e.g. because a corresponding subdirectory for
1622 master files exists). If none of the backends is responsible, then
1623 the first backend in the list that could register the file is chosen.
1624 As a consequence, the variable `vc-default-back-end' is now obsolete.
1625
1626 The old variable `vc-master-templates' is also obsolete, although VC
1627 still supports it for backward compatibility. To define templates for
1628 RCS or SCCS, you should rather use the new variables
1629 vc-{rcs,sccs}-master-templates. (There is no such feature under CVS
1630 where it doesn't make sense.)
1631
1632 The variables `vc-ignore-vc-files' and `vc-handle-cvs' are also
1633 obsolete now, you must set `vc-handled-backends' to nil or exclude
1634 `CVS' from the list, respectively, to achieve their effect now.
1635
1636 *** General Changes
1637
1638 The variable `vc-checkout-carefully' is obsolete: the corresponding
1639 checks are always done now.
1640
1641 VC Dired buffers are now kept up-to-date during all version control
1642 operations.
1643
1644 `vc-diff' output is now displayed in `diff-mode'.
1645 `vc-print-log' uses `log-view-mode'.
1646 `vc-log-mode' (used for *VC-Log*) has been replaced by `log-edit-mode'.
1647
1648 The command C-x v m (vc-merge) now accepts an empty argument as the
1649 first revision number. This means that any recent changes on the
1650 current branch should be picked up from the repository and merged into
1651 the working file (``merge news'').
1652
1653 The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r
1654 (vc-retrieve-snapshot) now ask for a directory name from which to work
1655 downwards.
1656
1657 *** Multiple Backends
1658
1659 VC now lets you register files in more than one backend. This is
1660 useful, for example, if you are working with a slow remote CVS
1661 repository. You can then use RCS for local editing, and occasionally
1662 commit your changes back to CVS, or pick up changes from CVS into your
1663 local RCS archives.
1664
1665 To make this work, the ``more local'' backend (RCS in our example)
1666 should come first in `vc-handled-backends', and the ``more remote''
1667 backend (CVS) should come later. (The default value of
1668 `vc-handled-backends' already has it that way.)
1669
1670 You can then commit changes to another backend (say, RCS), by typing
1671 C-u C-x v v RCS RET (i.e. vc-next-action now accepts a backend name as
1672 a revision number). VC registers the file in the more local backend
1673 if that hasn't already happened, and commits to a branch based on the
1674 current revision number from the more remote backend.
1675
1676 If a file is registered in multiple backends, you can switch to
1677 another one using C-x v b (vc-switch-backend). This does not change
1678 any files, it only changes VC's perspective on the file. Use this to
1679 pick up changes from CVS while working under RCS locally.
1680
1681 After you are done with your local RCS editing, you can commit your
1682 changes back to CVS using C-u C-x v v CVS RET. In this case, the
1683 local RCS archive is removed after the commit, and the log entry
1684 buffer is initialized to contain the entire RCS change log of the file.
1685
1686 *** Changes for CVS
1687
1688 There is a new user option, `vc-cvs-stay-local'. If it is `t' (the
1689 default), then VC avoids network queries for files registered in
1690 remote repositories. The state of such files is then only determined
1691 by heuristics and past information. `vc-cvs-stay-local' can also be a
1692 regexp to match against repository hostnames; only files from hosts
1693 that match it are treated locally. If the variable is nil, then VC
1694 queries the repository just as often as it does for local files.
1695
1696 If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, then VC also makes local backups of
1697 repository versions. This means that ordinary diffs (C-x v =) and
1698 revert operations (C-x v u) can be done completely locally, without
1699 any repository interactions at all. The name of a local version
1700 backup of FILE is FILE.~REV.~, where REV is the repository version
1701 number. This format is similar to that used by C-x v ~
1702 (vc-version-other-window), except for the trailing dot. As a matter
1703 of fact, the two features can each use the files created by the other,
1704 the only difference being that files with a trailing `.' are deleted
1705 automatically after commit. (This feature doesn't work on MS-DOS,
1706 since DOS disallows more than a single dot in the trunk of a file
1707 name.)
1708
1709 If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, and there have been changes in the
1710 repository, VC notifies you about it when you actually try to commit.
1711 If you want to check for updates from the repository without trying to
1712 commit, you can either use C-x v m RET to perform an update on the
1713 current file, or you can use C-x v r RET to get an update for an
1714 entire directory tree.
1715
1716 The new user option `vc-cvs-use-edit' indicates whether VC should call
1717 "cvs edit" to make files writeable; it defaults to `t'. (This option
1718 is only meaningful if the CVSREAD variable is set, or if files are
1719 "watched" by other developers.)
1720
1721 The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r
1722 (vc-retrieve-snapshot) are now also implemented for CVS. If you give
1723 an empty snapshot name to the latter, that performs a `cvs update',
1724 starting at the given directory.
1725
1726 *** Lisp Changes in VC
1727
1728 VC has been restructured internally to make it modular. You can now
1729 add support for arbitrary version control backends by writing a
1730 library that provides a certain set of backend-specific functions, and
1731 then telling VC to use that library. For example, to add support for
1732 a version system named SYS, you write a library named vc-sys.el, which
1733 provides a number of functions vc-sys-... (see commentary at the top
1734 of vc.el for a detailed list of them). To make VC use that library,
1735 you need to put it somewhere into Emacs' load path and add the symbol
1736 `SYS' to the list `vc-handled-backends'.
1737
1738 ** The customizable EDT emulation package now supports the EDT
1739 SUBS command and EDT scroll margins. It also works with more
1740 terminal/keyboard configurations and it now works under XEmacs.
1741 See etc/edt-user.doc for more information.
1742
1743 ** New modes and packages
1744
1745 *** The new global minor mode `minibuffer-electric-default-mode'
1746 automatically hides the `(default ...)' part of minibuffer prompts when
1747 the default is not applicable.
1748
1749 *** Artist is an Emacs lisp package that allows you to draw lines,
1750 rectangles and ellipses by using your mouse and/or keyboard. The
1751 shapes are made up with the ascii characters |, -, / and \.
1752
1753 Features are:
1754
1755 - Intersecting: When a `|' intersects with a `-', a `+' is
1756 drawn, like this: | \ /
1757 --+-- X
1758 | / \
1759
1760 - Rubber-banding: When drawing lines you can interactively see the
1761 result while holding the mouse button down and moving the mouse. If
1762 your machine is not fast enough (a 386 is a bit too slow, but a
1763 pentium is well enough), you can turn this feature off. You will
1764 then see 1's and 2's which mark the 1st and 2nd endpoint of the line
1765 you are drawing.
1766
1767 - Arrows: After having drawn a (straight) line or a (straight)
1768 poly-line, you can set arrows on the line-ends by typing < or >.
1769
1770 - Flood-filling: You can fill any area with a certain character by
1771 flood-filling.
1772
1773 - Cut copy and paste: You can cut, copy and paste rectangular
1774 regions. Artist also interfaces with the rect package (this can be
1775 turned off if it causes you any trouble) so anything you cut in
1776 artist can be yanked with C-x r y and vice versa.
1777
1778 - Drawing with keys: Everything you can do with the mouse, you can
1779 also do without the mouse.
1780
1781 - Aspect-ratio: You can set the variable artist-aspect-ratio to
1782 reflect the height-width ratio for the font you are using. Squares
1783 and circles are then drawn square/round. Note, that once your
1784 ascii-file is shown with font with a different height-width ratio,
1785 the squares won't be square and the circles won't be round.
1786
1787 - Drawing operations: The following drawing operations are implemented:
1788
1789 lines straight-lines
1790 rectangles squares
1791 poly-lines straight poly-lines
1792 ellipses circles
1793 text (see-thru) text (overwrite)
1794 spray-can setting size for spraying
1795 vaporize line vaporize lines
1796 erase characters erase rectangles
1797
1798 Straight lines are lines that go horizontally, vertically or
1799 diagonally. Plain lines go in any direction. The operations in
1800 the right column are accessed by holding down the shift key while
1801 drawing.
1802
1803 It is possible to vaporize (erase) entire lines and connected lines
1804 (rectangles for example) as long as the lines being vaporized are
1805 straight and connected at their endpoints. Vaporizing is inspired
1806 by the drawrect package by Jari Aalto <jari.aalto@poboxes.com>.
1807
1808 - Picture mode compatibility: Artist is picture mode compatible (this
1809 can be turned off).
1810
1811 +++
1812 *** The new package Eshell is an operating system command shell
1813 implemented entirely in Emacs Lisp. Use `M-x eshell' to invoke it.
1814 It functions similarly to bash and zsh, and allows running of Lisp
1815 functions and external commands using the same syntax. It supports
1816 history lists, aliases, extended globbing, smart scrolling, etc. It
1817 will work on any platform Emacs has been ported to. And since most of
1818 the basic commands -- ls, rm, mv, cp, ln, du, cat, etc. -- have been
1819 rewritten in Lisp, it offers an operating-system independent shell,
1820 all within the scope of your Emacs process.
1821
1822 +++
1823 *** The new package timeclock.el is a mode is for keeping track of time
1824 intervals. You can use it for whatever purpose you like, but the
1825 typical scenario is to keep track of how much time you spend working
1826 on certain projects.
1827
1828 +++
1829 *** The new package hi-lock.el provides commands to highlight matches
1830 of interactively entered regexps. For example,
1831
1832 M-x highlight-regexp RET clearly RET RET
1833
1834 will highlight all occurrences of `clearly' using a yellow background
1835 face. New occurrences of `clearly' will be highlighted as they are
1836 typed. `M-x unhighlight-regexp RET' will remove the highlighting.
1837 Any existing face can be used for highlighting and a set of
1838 appropriate faces is provided. The regexps can be written into the
1839 current buffer in a form that will be recognized the next time the
1840 corresponding file is read. There are commands to highlight matches
1841 to phrases and to highlight entire lines containing a match.
1842
1843 +++
1844 *** The new package zone.el plays games with Emacs' display when
1845 Emacs is idle.
1846
1847 +++
1848 *** The new package tildify.el allows to add hard spaces or other text
1849 fragments in accordance with the current major mode.
1850
1851 ---
1852 *** The new package xml.el provides a simple but generic XML
1853 parser. It doesn't parse the DTDs however.
1854
1855 +++
1856 *** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el
1857 package which allows different styles of comment-region and should
1858 be more robust while offering the same functionality.
1859 `comment-region' now doesn't always comment a-line-at-a-time, but only
1860 comments the region, breaking the line at point if necessary.
1861
1862 +++
1863 *** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags
1864 facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a
1865 separate Texinfo file.
1866
1867 +++
1868 *** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine or
1869 by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument)
1870 provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS. It comes with
1871 `log-view-mode' to view RCS and SCCS logs and `log-edit-mode' used to
1872 enter check-in log messages.
1873
1874 +++
1875 *** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages
1876 without invoking external programs.
1877
1878 The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp
1879 and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike
1880 `manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it
1881 is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and
1882 Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available.
1883
1884 The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man
1885 page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does.
1886
1887 +++
1888 *** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for
1889 authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback.
1890
1891 The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for
1892 the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in
1893 the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing.
1894 Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so
1895 even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a
1896 single step.
1897
1898 On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like
1899 matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will
1900 probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp
1901 contains such to get feedback about their respective limits.
1902
1903 +++
1904 *** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
1905 unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
1906 actually modifying content of a buffer.
1907
1908 ---
1909 *** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
1910 PostScript.
1911
1912 Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
1913
1914 The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
1915
1916 ; comment (until end of line)
1917 A non-terminal
1918 "C" terminal
1919 ?C? special
1920 $A default non-terminal
1921 $"C" default terminal
1922 $?C? default special
1923 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
1924 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
1925 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
1926 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
1927 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
1928 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
1929 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
1930 C+ one or more occurrences of C
1931 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
1932 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
1933 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
1934 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
1935 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
1936 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1937 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1938
1939 Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
1940
1941 ---
1942 *** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
1943 align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
1944 determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
1945 example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
1946 equal signs of assignments.
1947
1948 +++
1949 *** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
1950 paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
1951
1952 +++
1953 *** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
1954 list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
1955 buffer menu with this package. See the Custom group `bs'.
1956
1957 ---
1958 *** find-lisp.el is a package emulating the Unix find command in Lisp.
1959
1960 ---
1961 *** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
1962 replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
1963 is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
1964 and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
1965 not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
1966 which answers different needs.
1967
1968 +++
1969 *** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
1970 suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
1971 expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
1972 course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
1973 reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
1974 to be enabled.
1975
1976 +++
1977 *** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
1978 containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
1979
1980 +++
1981 *** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
1982
1983 +++
1984 *** hl-line.el provides `hl-line-mode', a minor mode to highlight the
1985 current line in the current buffer. It also provides
1986 `global-hl-line-mode' to provide the same behaviour in all buffers.
1987
1988 ---
1989 *** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
1990
1991 Please note: if `ansi-color-for-comint-mode' and
1992 `global-font-lock-mode' are non-nil, loading ansi-color.el will
1993 disable font-lock and add `ansi-color-apply' to
1994 `comint-preoutput-filter-functions' for all shell-mode buffers. This
1995 displays the output of "ls --color=yes" using the correct foreground
1996 and background colors.
1997
1998 ---
1999 *** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
2000 Pascal) language.
2001
2002 +++
2003 *** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
2004 the text at point.
2005
2006 ---
2007 *** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
2008
2009 +++
2010 *** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
2011
2012 ---
2013 *** whitespace.el is a package for warning about and cleaning bogus
2014 whitespace in a file.
2015
2016 ---
2017 *** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
2018 files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
2019 (very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
2020 interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
2021 often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
2022 uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
2023 codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
2024
2025 ---
2026 *** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
2027
2028 Here is an example of columns:
2029
2030 horse apple bus
2031 dog pineapple car EXTRA
2032 porcupine strawberry airplane
2033
2034 Doing the following settings:
2035
2036 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
2037 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
2038 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
2039 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
2040
2041
2042 Selecting the lines above and typing:
2043
2044 M-x delimit-columns-region
2045
2046 It results:
2047
2048 [ horse , apple , bus , ]
2049 [ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
2050 [ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
2051
2052 delim-col has the following options:
2053
2054 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
2055 before all columns.
2056
2057 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
2058 between each column.
2059
2060 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
2061 after all columns.
2062
2063 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
2064 each column.
2065
2066 delim-col has the following commands:
2067
2068 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
2069 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
2070
2071 +++
2072 *** Recentf mode maintains a menu for visiting files that were
2073 operated on recently. User option recentf-menu-filter specifies a
2074 menu filter function to change the menu appearance. For example, the
2075 recent file list can be displayed:
2076
2077 - organized by major modes, directories or user defined rules.
2078 - sorted by file paths, file names, ascending or descending.
2079 - showing paths relative to the current default-directory
2080
2081 The `recentf-filter-changer' menu filter function allows to
2082 dynamically change the menu appearance.
2083
2084 ---
2085 *** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
2086 text.
2087
2088 +++
2089 *** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
2090 of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
2091 specific to Message mode.
2092
2093 +++
2094 *** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
2095 viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
2096 with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
2097
2098 ---
2099 *** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
2100 interface to access directory servers using different directory
2101 protocols. It has a separate manual.
2102
2103 ---
2104 *** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files
2105 for Autoconf, selected automatically.
2106
2107 +++
2108 *** windmove.el provides moving between windows.
2109
2110 ---
2111 *** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the
2112 minibuffer with completion.
2113
2114 ---
2115 *** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration
2116 with the diary features.
2117
2118 ---
2119 *** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby
2120 numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting.
2121
2122 ---
2123 *** The function `turn-off-auto-fill' unconditionally turns off Auto
2124 Fill mode.
2125
2126 ---
2127 *** pcomplete.el is a library that provides programmable completion
2128 facilities for Emacs, similar to what zsh and tcsh offer. The main
2129 difference is that completion functions are written in Lisp, meaning
2130 they can be profiled, debugged, etc.
2131
2132 ---
2133 *** antlr-mode is a new major mode for editing ANTLR grammar files.
2134 It is automatically turned on for files whose names have the extension
2135 `.g'.
2136
2137 +++
2138 ** Changes in sort.el
2139
2140 The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
2141 as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
2142 new user-option sort-numeric-base can be used to specify a default
2143 numeric base.
2144
2145 ** Changes to Ange-ftp
2146
2147 +++
2148 *** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
2149 names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
2150 sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
2151
2152 ---
2153 *** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive
2154 ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that.
2155
2156 ---
2157 *** Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients which
2158 output ^M at the end of lines.
2159
2160 +++
2161 ** The recommended way of using Iswitchb is via the new global minor
2162 mode `iswitchb-mode'.
2163
2164 +++
2165 ** Just loading the msb package doesn't switch on Msb mode anymore.
2166 If you have `(require 'msb)' in your .emacs, please replace it with
2167 `(msb-mode 1)'.
2168
2169 ---
2170 ** Flyspell mode has various new options. See the `flyspell' Custom
2171 group.
2172
2173 ---
2174 ** The user option `backward-delete-char-untabify-method' controls the
2175 behavior of `backward-delete-char-untabify'. The following values
2176 are recognized:
2177
2178 `untabify' -- turn a tab to many spaces, then delete one space;
2179 `hungry' -- delete all whitespace, both tabs and spaces;
2180 `all' -- delete all whitespace, including tabs, spaces and newlines;
2181 nil -- just delete one character.
2182
2183 Default value is `untabify'.
2184
2185 [This change was made in Emacs 20.3 but not mentioned then.]
2186
2187 ---
2188 ** In Cperl mode `cperl-invalid-face' should now be a normal face
2189 symbol, not double-quoted.
2190
2191 ---
2192 ** Some packages are declared obsolete, to be removed in a future
2193 version. They are: auto-show, c-mode, hilit19, hscroll, ooutline,
2194 profile, rnews, rnewspost, and sc. Their implementations have been
2195 moved to lisp/obsolete.
2196
2197 +++
2198 ** auto-compression mode is no longer enabled just by loading jka-compr.el.
2199 To control it, set `auto-compression-mode' via Custom or use the
2200 `auto-compression-mode' command.
2201
2202 ---
2203 ** `browse-url-gnome-moz' is a new option for
2204 `browse-url-browser-function', invoking Mozilla in GNOME, and
2205 `browse-url-kde' can be chosen for invoking the KDE browser.
2206
2207 ---
2208 ** The user-option `browse-url-new-window-p' has been renamed to
2209 `browse-url-new-window-flag'.
2210
2211 +++
2212 ** The functions `keep-lines', `flush-lines' and `how-many' now
2213 operate on the active region in Transient Mark mode.
2214
2215 +++
2216 ** `gnus-user-agent' is a new possibility for `mail-user-agent'. It
2217 is like `message-user-agent', but with all the Gnus paraphernalia.
2218
2219 ---
2220 ** The Strokes package has been updated. If your Emacs has XPM
2221 support, you can use it for pictographic editing. In Strokes mode,
2222 use C-mouse-2 to compose a complex stoke and insert it into the
2223 buffer. You can encode or decode a strokes buffer with new commands
2224 M-x strokes-encode-buffer and M-x strokes-decode-buffer. There is a
2225 new command M-x strokes-list-strokes.
2226
2227 +++
2228 ** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts
2229 a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer.
2230
2231 ---
2232 ** Hexl mode allows to insert non-ASCII characters.
2233
2234 The non-ASCII characters are encoded using the same encoding as the
2235 file you are visiting in Hexl mode.
2236
2237 ---
2238 ** Shell script mode changes.
2239
2240 Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
2241 derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizable, and
2242 sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
2243
2244 ---
2245 ** Etags changes.
2246
2247 *** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
2248
2249 *** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
2250 possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
2251 {lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
2252 This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
2253 a regular expression. The manual contains details.
2254
2255 *** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
2256 declarations when given the --declarations option.
2257
2258 *** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
2259 "operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
2260
2261 *** You shouldn't generally need any more the -C or -c++ option: etags
2262 automatically switches to C++ parsing when it meets the `class' or
2263 `template' keywords.
2264
2265 *** Etags now is able to delve at arbitrary deeps into nested structures in
2266 C-like languages. Previously, it was limited to one or two brace levels.
2267
2268 *** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
2269 types.
2270
2271 *** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged.
2272
2273 *** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
2274
2275 *** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
2276 are now tagged.
2277
2278 *** In makefiles, tags the targets.
2279
2280 *** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
2281 variables are tagged.
2282
2283 *** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
2284
2285 *** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
2286 for PSWrap.
2287
2288 +++
2289 ** Changes in etags.el
2290
2291 *** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make
2292 tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default
2293 is to use the same setting as case-fold-search.
2294
2295 *** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
2296 the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
2297
2298 If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
2299 FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
2300 TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
2301 obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
2302
2303 TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
2304
2305 FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
2306 List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
2307
2308 A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
2309
2310 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
2311 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
2312 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
2313
2314 *** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
2315 of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
2316
2317 *** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
2318 names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
2319
2320 *** You can now search for tags that are part of the filename itself.
2321 If you have tagged the files topfile.c subdir/subfile.c
2322 /tmp/tempfile.c, you can now search for tags "topfile.c", "subfile.c",
2323 "dir/sub", "tempfile", "tempfile.c". If the tag matches the file name,
2324 point will go to the beginning of the file.
2325
2326 *** Compressed files are now transparently supported if
2327 auto-compression-mode is active. You can tag (with Etags) and search
2328 (with find-tag) both compressed and uncompressed files.
2329
2330 *** Tags commands like M-x tags-search no longer change point
2331 in buffers where no match is found. In buffers where a match is
2332 found, the original value of point is pushed on the marker ring.
2333
2334 +++
2335 ** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sequence-nos' to
2336 remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
2337 appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
2338
2339 ** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
2340
2341 +++
2342 ** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
2343
2344 +++
2345 ** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignored-regexps'
2346 containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular
2347 expression from that list, are not checked.
2348
2349 ---
2350 ** Emacs can now figure out modification times of remote files.
2351 When you do C-x C-f /user@host:/path/file RET and edit the file,
2352 and someone else modifies the file, you will be prompted to revert
2353 the buffer, just like for the local files.
2354
2355 ---
2356 ** The buffer menu (C-x C-b) no longer lists the *Buffer List* buffer.
2357
2358 +++
2359 ** When invoked with a prefix argument, the command `list-abbrevs' now
2360 displays local abbrevs, only.
2361
2362 +++
2363 ** Refill minor mode provides preliminary support for keeping
2364 paragraphs filled as you modify them.
2365
2366 ** The variable `double-click-fuzz' specifies how much the mouse
2367 may be moved between clicks that are recognized as a pair. Its value
2368 is measured in pixels.
2369
2370 +++
2371 ** The new global minor mode `auto-image-file-mode' allows image files
2372 to be visited as images.
2373
2374 ---
2375 ** Withdrawn packages
2376
2377 *** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
2378 functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
2379
2380 *** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
2381
2382 *** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
2383
2384 \f
2385 * Incompatible Lisp changes
2386
2387 There are a few Lisp changes which are not backwards-compatible and
2388 may require changes to existing code. Here is a list for reference.
2389 See the sections below for details.
2390
2391 ** Since `format' preserves text properties, the idiom
2392 `(format "%s" foo)' no longer works to copy and remove properties.
2393 Use `copy-sequence' and `set-text-properties'.
2394
2395 ** Since the `keymap' text property now has significance, some code
2396 which uses both `local-map' and `keymap' properties (for portability)
2397 may, for instance, give rise to duplicate menus when the keymaps from
2398 these properties are active.
2399
2400 ** The change in the treatment of non-ASCII characters in search
2401 ranges may affect some code.
2402
2403 ** A non-nil value for the LOCAL arg of add-hook makes the hook
2404 buffer-local even if `make-local-hook' hasn't been called, which might
2405 make a difference to some code.
2406
2407 ** The new treatment of the minibuffer prompt might affect code which
2408 operates on the minibuffer.
2409
2410 ** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
2411 cause `no-conversion' and `emacs-mule-unix' coding systems to produce
2412 different results when reading files with non-ASCII characters
2413 (previously, both coding systems would produce the same results).
2414 Specifically, `no-conversion' interprets each 8-bit byte as a separate
2415 character. This makes `no-conversion' inappropriate for reading
2416 multibyte text, e.g. buffers written to disk in their internal MULE
2417 encoding (auto-saving does that, for example). If a Lisp program
2418 reads such files with `no-conversion', each byte of the multibyte
2419 sequence, including the MULE leading codes such as \201, is treated as
2420 a separate character, which prevents them from being interpreted in
2421 the buffer as multibyte characters.
2422
2423 Therefore, Lisp programs that read files which contain the internal
2424 MULE encoding should use `emacs-mule-unix'. `no-conversion' is only
2425 appropriate for reading truly binary files.
2426
2427 ** Code that relies on the obsolete `before-change-function' and
2428 `after-change-function' to detect buffer changes will now fail. Use
2429 `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions' instead.
2430
2431 ** Code that uses `concat' with integer args now gets an error, as
2432 long promised.
2433
2434 ** The function base64-decode-string now always returns a unibyte
2435 string.
2436
2437 ** Not a Lisp incompatibility as such but, with the introduction of
2438 extra private charsets, there is now only one slot free for a new
2439 dimension-2 private charset. User code which tries to add more than
2440 one extra will fail unless you rebuild Emacs with some standard
2441 charset(s) removed; that is probably inadvisable because it changes
2442 the emacs-mule encoding. Also, files stored in the emacs-mule
2443 encoding using Emacs 20 with additional private charsets defined will
2444 probably not be read correctly by Emacs 21.
2445
2446 ** The variable `directory-sep-char' is slated for removal.
2447 Not really a change (yet), but a projected one that you should be
2448 aware of: The variable `directory-sep-char' is deprecated, and should
2449 not be used. It was always ignored on GNU/Linux and Unix systems and
2450 on MS-DOS, but the MS-Windows port tried to support it by adapting the
2451 behavior of certain primitives to the value of this variable. It
2452 turned out that such support cannot be reliable, so it was decided to
2453 remove this variable in the near future. Lisp programs are well
2454 advised not to set it to anything but '/', because any different value
2455 will not have any effect when support for this variable is removed.
2456
2457 \f
2458 * Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual,
2459 (Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.)
2460
2461 ** The new function amimate-string, from lisp/play/animate.el
2462 allows the animated display of strings.
2463
2464 ** The new function `interactive-form' can be used to obtain the
2465 interactive form of a function.
2466
2467 ** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
2468 between custom options. Example:
2469
2470 (defcustom default-input-method nil
2471 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
2472 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
2473 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
2474 :group 'mule
2475 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
2476 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
2477
2478 This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
2479 current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
2480 first in a custom-set-variables statement.
2481
2482 ** The new hook `kbd-macro-termination-hook' is run at the end of
2483 function execute-kbd-macro. Functions on this hook are called with no
2484 args. The hook is run independent of how the macro was terminated
2485 (signal or normal termination).
2486
2487 +++
2488 ** Functions `butlast' and `nbutlast' for removing trailing elements
2489 from a list are now available without requiring the CL package.
2490
2491 +++
2492 ** The new user-option `even-window-heights' can be set to nil
2493 to prevent `display-buffer' from evening out window heights.
2494
2495 +++
2496 ** The user-option `face-font-registry-alternatives' specifies
2497 alternative font registry names to try when looking for a font.
2498
2499 ** Function `md5' calculates the MD5 "message digest"/"checksum".
2500
2501 +++
2502 ** Function `delete-frame' runs `delete-frame-hook' before actually
2503 deleting the frame. The hook is called with one arg, the frame
2504 being deleted.
2505
2506 +++
2507 ** `add-hook' now makes the hook local if called with a non-nil LOCAL arg.
2508
2509 +++
2510 ** The treatment of non-ASCII characters in search ranges has changed.
2511 If a range in a regular expression or the arg of
2512 skip-chars-forward/backward starts with a unibyte character C and ends
2513 with a multibyte character C2, the range is divided into two: one is
2514 C..?\377, the other is C1..C2, where C1 is the first character of C2's
2515 charset.
2516
2517 +++
2518 ** The new function `display-message-or-buffer' displays a message in
2519 the echo area or pops up a buffer, depending on the length of the
2520 message.
2521
2522 ** The new macro `with-auto-compression-mode' allows evaluating an
2523 expression with auto-compression-mode enabled.
2524
2525 +++
2526 ** In image specifications, `:heuristic-mask' has been replaced
2527 with the more general `:mask' property.
2528
2529 +++
2530 ** Image specifications accept more `:conversion's.
2531
2532 ** A `?' can be used in a symbol name without escaping it with a
2533 backslash.
2534
2535 +++
2536 ** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
2537 is running in batch mode. For example,
2538
2539 (message "%s" (read t))
2540
2541 will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
2542 to standard output.
2543
2544 +++
2545 ** The argument of `down-list', `backward-up-list', `up-list',
2546 `kill-sexp', `backward-kill-sexp' and `mark-sexp' is now optional.
2547
2548 ** If `display-buffer-reuse-frames' is set, function `display-buffer'
2549 will raise frames displaying a buffer, instead of creating a new
2550 frame or window.
2551
2552 +++
2553 ** Two new functions for removing elements from lists/sequences
2554 were added
2555
2556 - Function: remove ELT SEQ
2557
2558 Return a copy of SEQ with all occurrences of ELT removed. SEQ must be
2559 a list, vector, or string. The comparison is done with `equal'.
2560
2561 - Function: remq ELT LIST
2562
2563 Return a copy of LIST with all occurrences of ELT removed. The
2564 comparison is done with `eq'.
2565
2566 +++
2567 ** The function `delete' now also works with vectors and strings.
2568
2569 ** The meaning of the `:weakness WEAK' argument of make-hash-table
2570 has been changed.
2571
2572 +++
2573 ** Function `aset' stores any multibyte character in any string
2574 without signaling "Attempt to change char length of a string". It may
2575 convert a unibyte string to multibyte if necessary.
2576
2577 +++
2578 ** The value of the `help-echo' text property is called as a function
2579 or evaluated, if it is not a string already, to obtain a help string.
2580
2581 ** Function `make-obsolete' now has an optional arg to say when the
2582 function was declared obsolete.
2583
2584 +++
2585 ** Function `plist-member' is renamed from `widget-plist-member' (which is
2586 retained as an alias).
2587
2588 ** Easy-menu's :filter now works as in XEmacs.
2589 It takes the unconverted (i.e. XEmacs) form of the menu and the result
2590 is automatically converted to Emacs' form.
2591
2592 ** The new function `window-list' has been defined
2593
2594 - Function: window-list &optional FRAME WINDOW MINIBUF
2595
2596 Return a list of windows on FRAME, starting with WINDOW. FRAME nil or
2597 omitted means use the selected frame. WINDOW nil or omitted means use
2598 the selected window. MINIBUF t means include the minibuffer window,
2599 even if it isn't active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means include the
2600 minibuffer window only if it's active. MINIBUF neither nil nor t
2601 means never include the minibuffer window.
2602
2603 ** There's a new function `some-window' defined as follows
2604
2605 - Function: some-window PREDICATE &optional MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES DEFAULT
2606
2607 Return a window satisfying PREDICATE.
2608
2609 This function cycles through all visible windows using `walk-windows',
2610 calling PREDICATE on each one. PREDICATE is called with a window as
2611 argument. The first window for which PREDICATE returns a non-nil
2612 value is returned. If no window satisfies PREDICATE, DEFAULT is
2613 returned.
2614
2615 Optional second arg MINIBUF t means count the minibuffer window even
2616 if not active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means count the minibuffer iff
2617 it is active. MINIBUF neither t nor nil means not to count the
2618 minibuffer even if it is active.
2619
2620 Several frames may share a single minibuffer; if the minibuffer
2621 counts, all windows on all frames that share that minibuffer count
2622 too. Therefore, if you are using a separate minibuffer frame
2623 and the minibuffer is active and MINIBUF says it counts,
2624 `walk-windows' includes the windows in the frame from which you
2625 entered the minibuffer, as well as the minibuffer window.
2626
2627 ALL-FRAMES is the optional third argument.
2628 ALL-FRAMES nil or omitted means cycle within the frames as specified above.
2629 ALL-FRAMES = `visible' means include windows on all visible frames.
2630 ALL-FRAMES = 0 means include windows on all visible and iconified frames.
2631 ALL-FRAMES = t means include windows on all frames including invisible frames.
2632 If ALL-FRAMES is a frame, it means include windows on that frame.
2633 Anything else means restrict to the selected frame.
2634
2635 ** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key and
2636 event names in angle brackets. When called with a second optional
2637 argument non-nil, angle brackets won't be printed.
2638
2639 ** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a
2640 call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that
2641 message; it will be truncated instead, as it was done in 20.x.
2642 Default value is nil.
2643
2644 +++
2645 ** The user option `line-number-display-limit' can now be set to nil,
2646 meaning no limit.
2647
2648 +++
2649 ** The new user option `line-number-display-limit-width' controls
2650 the maximum width of lines in a buffer for which Emacs displays line
2651 numbers in the mode line. The default is 200.
2652
2653 ** `select-safe-coding-system' now also checks the most preferred
2654 coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and
2655 DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified,
2656
2657 +++
2658 ** The function `subr-arity' provides information about the argument
2659 list of a primitive.
2660
2661 ** `where-is-internal' now also accepts a list of keymaps.
2662
2663 +++
2664 ** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the
2665 buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property.
2666 This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather
2667 than replacing the local map.
2668
2669 ** The obsolete variables `before-change-function' and
2670 `after-change-function' are no longer acted upon and have been
2671 removed. Use `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions'
2672 instead.
2673
2674 ** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'.
2675
2676 +++
2677 ** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments,
2678 as promised long ago.
2679
2680 ** The new function `float-time' returns the current time as a float.
2681
2682 ** The new variable auto-coding-regexp-alist specifies coding systems
2683 for reading specific files, analogous to auto-coding-alist, but
2684 patterns are checked against file contents instead of file names.
2685
2686 \f
2687 * Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
2688
2689 Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
2690 --- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
2691 When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
2692 so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
2693
2694 *** The features `md5' and `overlay' are now provided by default.
2695
2696 *** The special form `save-restriction' now works correctly even if the
2697 buffer is widened inside the save-restriction and changes made outside
2698 the original restriction. Previously, doing this would cause the saved
2699 restriction to be restored incorrectly.
2700
2701 *** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include
2702 `eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list
2703 when they find 8-bit characters. Previously, they included `ascii' in a
2704 multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer.
2705
2706 *** The functions `set-buffer-modified', `string-as-multibyte' and
2707 `string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer if it
2708 contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set.
2709
2710 *** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is
2711 changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern
2712 [\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character
2713 regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if
2714 the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the
2715 extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra
2716 bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset
2717 eight-bit-graphic.
2718
2719 ** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables.
2720
2721 A fontset can now be specified for each independent character, for
2722 a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a
2723 character set as previously.
2724
2725 *** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed.
2726 They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function
2727 modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER.
2728
2729 CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic
2730 characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the
2731 range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that
2732 case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset.
2733
2734 FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family
2735 name of a font and REGISTRY is a registry name of a font.
2736
2737 *** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset
2738 registries of character sets are set in the default fontset
2739 "fontset-default".
2740
2741 *** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second
2742 argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets.
2743
2744 ** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character
2745 composition is done by a special text property `composition' in
2746 buffers and strings.
2747
2748 *** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite
2749 character' which is an independent character with a unique character
2750 code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters'
2751 have been deleted: composite-char-component,
2752 composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule,
2753 composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete.
2754 The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have
2755 also been deleted.
2756
2757 *** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to
2758 specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable
2759 `reference-point-alist' for more detail.
2760
2761 *** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and
2762 MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a
2763 composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters
2764 may differ between buffer and string text.
2765
2766 *** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END,
2767 COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC.
2768
2769 *** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition'
2770 directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string.
2771 Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property
2772 `composition' from STRING.
2773
2774 *** The new function `find-composition' returns information about
2775 a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string.
2776
2777 *** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as
2778 obsolete.
2779
2780 ** The new coding system `mac-roman' is primarily intended for use on
2781 the Macintosh but may be used generally for Macintosh-encoded text.
2782
2783 ** The new character sets `mule-unicode-0100-24ff',
2784 `mule-unicode-2500-33ff', and `mule-unicode-e000-ffff' have been
2785 introduced for Unicode characters in the range U+0100..U+24FF,
2786 U+2500..U+33FF, U+E000..U+FFFF respectively.
2787
2788 Note that the character sets are not yet unified in Emacs, so
2789 characters which belong to charsets such as Latin-2, Greek, Hebrew,
2790 etc. and the same characters in the `mule-unicode-*' charsets are
2791 different characters, as far as Emacs is concerned. For example, text
2792 which includes Unicode characters from the Latin-2 locale cannot be
2793 encoded by Emacs with ISO 8859-2 coding system.
2794
2795 ** The new coding system `mule-utf-8' has been added.
2796 It provides limited support for decoding/encoding UTF-8 text. For
2797 details, please see the documentation string of this coding system.
2798
2799 ** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and
2800 `japanese-jisx0213-2' have been introduced for the new Japanese
2801 standard JIS X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2.
2802
2803 ** The new character sets `latin-iso8859-14' and `latin-iso8859-15'
2804 have been introduced.
2805
2806 +++
2807 ** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
2808 have been introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and
2809 0xA0..0xFF respectively. Note that the multibyte representation of
2810 eight-bit-control is never exposed; this leads to an exception in the
2811 emacs-mule coding system, which encodes everything else to the
2812 buffer/string internal representation. Note that to search for
2813 eight-bit-graphic characters in a multibyte buffer, the search string
2814 must be multibyte, otherwise such characters will be converted to
2815 their multibyte equivalent.
2816
2817 +++
2818 ** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to
2819 that offset in the file before writing.
2820
2821 ** The function `add-minor-mode' has been added for convenience and
2822 compatibility with XEmacs (and is used internally by define-minor-mode).
2823
2824 ** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the
2825 `*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer
2826 from which the command was issued.
2827
2828 ** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp',
2829 `query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp',
2830 `replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two
2831 additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to
2832 operate on.
2833
2834 ** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative
2835 to `window-buffer-height'.
2836
2837 - Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW
2838
2839 Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END.
2840 The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual
2841 lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc.
2842
2843 Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max'
2844 respectively.
2845
2846 If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optional third argument
2847 COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil.
2848
2849 The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for
2850 obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so
2851 on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters.
2852
2853 Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current
2854 buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes
2855 possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it
2856 is currently displayed in some window.
2857
2858 ** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the
2859 argument function's results.
2860
2861 ** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now
2862 signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails. Also,
2863 base64-decode-string now always returns a unibyte string (in Emacs 20,
2864 it returned a multibyte string when the result was a valid multibyte
2865 sequence).
2866
2867 ** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body'
2868 header in the list of headers passed to it.
2869
2870 ** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but
2871 ignores differences in case and text representation.
2872
2873 ** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the
2874 cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted
2875 as follows:
2876
2877 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default)
2878 nil don't display a cursor
2879 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width
2880 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH
2881 others display a box cursor.
2882
2883 ** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether
2884 an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a
2885 defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not
2886 set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning.
2887
2888 ** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax
2889 specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to
2890 the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table'
2891 text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'.
2892
2893 Example:
2894
2895 (string-to-syntax "()")
2896 => (4 . 41)
2897
2898 ** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases
2899 other than 10.
2900
2901 *** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2).
2902 INTEGER optionally contains a sign.
2903
2904 #b1111
2905 => 15
2906 #b-1111
2907 => -15
2908
2909 *** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8).
2910
2911 #o666
2912 => 438
2913
2914 *** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16).
2915
2916 #xbeef
2917 => 48815
2918
2919 *** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36.
2920
2921 #2R-111
2922 => -7
2923 #25rah
2924 => 267
2925
2926 ** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of
2927 the given property to obtain a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
2928 and isn't a string.
2929
2930 ** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for
2931 a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil
2932 value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is
2933 not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string.
2934
2935 +++
2936 ** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
2937
2938 ** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches
2939 for a regexp in a string.
2940
2941 ** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
2942 `mouse-position-function'.
2943
2944 ** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
2945 that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
2946
2947 ** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
2948 Keywords are now always considered constants.
2949
2950 +++
2951 ** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
2952 returns it.
2953
2954 ** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
2955 returned by function `recent-keys'.
2956
2957 +++
2958 ** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
2959 can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
2960 Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a
2961 etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
2962 mode.
2963
2964 +++
2965 ** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
2966 and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
2967
2968 +++
2969 ** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
2970 has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
2971 function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
2972 returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
2973 been performed."
2974
2975 When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
2976 and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
2977 hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
2978 then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
2979
2980 +++
2981 ** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
2982 In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
2983 and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
2984
2985 +++
2986 ** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
2987 with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
2988 specified table.
2989
2990 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
2991
2992 Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
2993 TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
2994 saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
2995 what BODY returns.
2996
2997 +++
2998 ** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
2999 Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
3000 Also back-references like \2 are now considered as an error if the
3001 corresponding subgroup does not exist (or is not closed yet).
3002 Previously it would have been silently turned into `2' (ignoring the `\').
3003
3004 +++
3005 ** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
3006 removed since it wasn't used by anything.
3007
3008 +++
3009 ** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
3010 instead of being optional.
3011
3012 +++
3013 ** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
3014 modify read-only text.
3015
3016 ** New functions and variables for locales.
3017
3018 +++
3019 The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
3020 decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
3021 time functions like strftime. The new variables
3022 `system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
3023 locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
3024
3025 The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
3026 environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
3027 the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
3028 environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
3029 not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
3030 `locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
3031 `locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
3032
3033 +++
3034 ** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
3035 To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
3036 modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
3037 start sequences.
3038
3039 +++
3040 ** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
3041 because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
3042
3043 +++
3044 ** New function `propertize'
3045
3046 The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
3047 strings with text properties.
3048
3049 - Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
3050
3051 Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
3052 by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
3053 PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
3054 specified value of that property. Example:
3055
3056 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
3057
3058 +++
3059 ** push and pop macros.
3060
3061 Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
3062 are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
3063 as the place that holds the list to be changed.
3064
3065 (push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
3066 (pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
3067 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
3068
3069 ** New dolist and dotimes macros.
3070
3071 Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
3072 are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
3073
3074 (dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
3075 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
3076 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
3077 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
3078
3079 (dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
3080 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
3081 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
3082 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
3083
3084 +++
3085 ** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such as
3086 [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on. These must be used within a character
3087 class--for instance, [-[:digit:].+] matches digits or a period
3088 or a sign.
3089
3090 [:digit:] matches 0 through 9
3091 [:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
3092 [:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
3093 [:blank:] matches space and tab only
3094 [:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
3095 space, and DEL.
3096 [:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
3097 and DEL.
3098 [:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
3099 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
3100 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
3101 [:alpha:] matches letters.
3102 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
3103 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
3104 [:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
3105 [:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
3106 [:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
3107 [:punct:] matches punctuation.
3108 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
3109 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
3110 [:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
3111 [:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
3112 [:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
3113
3114 +++
3115 ** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
3116
3117 The following functions are defined for hash tables:
3118
3119 - Function: make-hash-table ARGS
3120
3121 The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
3122 are optional. The following arguments are defined:
3123
3124 :test TEST
3125
3126 TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
3127 Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
3128 it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
3129
3130 :size SIZE
3131
3132 SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
3133 many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
3134
3135 :rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
3136
3137 REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
3138 full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
3139 size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
3140 1.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
3141 old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
3142
3143 :rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
3144
3145 THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
3146 hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
3147 (size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
3148
3149 :weakness WEAK
3150
3151 WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value',
3152 `key-or-value', `key-and-value', or t, meaning the same as
3153 `key-and-value'. Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage
3154 collection if their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere
3155 outside of the hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
3156
3157 - Function: makehash &optional TEST
3158
3159 Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
3160
3161 - Function: hash-table-p TABLE
3162
3163 Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
3164
3165 - Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
3166
3167 Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
3168 values are shared.
3169
3170 - Function: hash-table-count TABLE
3171
3172 Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
3173
3174 - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
3175
3176 Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
3177
3178 - Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
3179
3180 Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
3181
3182 - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
3183
3184 Returns the size of TABLE.
3185
3186 - Function: hash-table-test TABLE
3187
3188 Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
3189
3190 - Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
3191
3192 Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
3193
3194 - Function: clrhash TABLE
3195
3196 Clear TABLE.
3197
3198 - Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
3199
3200 Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
3201 not found.
3202
3203 - Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
3204
3205 Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
3206 another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
3207
3208 - Function: remhash KEY TABLE
3209
3210 Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
3211
3212 - Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
3213
3214 Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
3215 arguments KEY and VALUE.
3216
3217 - Function: sxhash OBJ
3218
3219 Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
3220
3221 - Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
3222
3223 Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
3224 a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
3225 comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
3226 and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
3227 of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
3228
3229 TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
3230
3231 HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
3232 code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
3233 integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
3234
3235 Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
3236 be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
3237
3238 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
3239 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
3240
3241 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
3242 (sxhash (upcase a)))
3243
3244 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
3245 'case-fold-string-hash))
3246
3247 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
3248
3249 +++
3250 ** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
3251
3252 It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
3253 circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
3254 a cons cell which is its own cdr.
3255
3256 +++
3257 ** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
3258
3259 If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
3260 #N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
3261
3262 +++
3263 ** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
3264 t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
3265 specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
3266 is too short to reach that column.
3267
3268 +++
3269 ** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
3270 now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
3271 after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
3272 two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
3273
3274 If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
3275 perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
3276 and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
3277
3278 +++
3279 ** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
3280 to specify which buffer to return the size of.
3281
3282 +++
3283 ** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
3284 calendar-move-hook after moving point.
3285
3286 +++
3287 ** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
3288 directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
3289 small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
3290 small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
3291 temporary-file-directory instead.
3292
3293 +++
3294 ** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
3295 the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
3296 `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
3297 hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
3298
3299 +++
3300 ** assq-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
3301 elements of an alist which have a car `eq' to a particular value.
3302
3303 +++
3304 ** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
3305
3306 make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
3307 creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
3308 ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
3309
3310 +++
3311 ** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
3312
3313 The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
3314 on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
3315 is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
3316 never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
3317 ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
3318 overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
3319
3320 If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
3321 that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
3322 to get an error if the file exists at that time.
3323 The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
3324
3325 +++
3326 ** Function `format' now handles text properties.
3327
3328 Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
3329 If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
3330 ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
3331 result string.
3332
3333 Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
3334 string where arguments appear in the result string.
3335
3336 Example:
3337
3338 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
3339 (s2 "world"))
3340 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
3341 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
3342 (format s1 s2))
3343
3344 results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
3345
3346 +++
3347 ** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
3348
3349 Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
3350 The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
3351 argument in it.
3352
3353 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
3354 (arg "world"))
3355 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
3356 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
3357 (message msg arg))
3358
3359 +++
3360 ** Sound support
3361
3362 Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
3363 (Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
3364
3365 Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
3366 (*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
3367 to enable sound support.
3368
3369 Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
3370 list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
3371 when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
3372 functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
3373 sound to play, before playing the sound.
3374
3375 The following sound properties are supported:
3376
3377 - `:file FILE'
3378
3379 FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
3380 searched relative to `data-directory'.
3381
3382 - `:data DATA'
3383
3384 DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
3385 may be present, but not both.
3386
3387 - `:volume VOLUME'
3388
3389 VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
3390 0..1. This property is optional.
3391
3392 - `:device DEVICE'
3393
3394 DEVICE is a string specifying the system device on which to play the
3395 sound. The default device is system-dependent.
3396
3397 Other properties are ignored.
3398
3399 An alternative interface is called as
3400 (play-sound-file FILE &optional VOLUME DEVICE).
3401
3402 ** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
3403
3404 +++
3405 ** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
3406 a keyword symbol.
3407
3408 ** Changes to garbage collection
3409
3410 *** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
3411 of live and free strings.
3412
3413 *** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
3414 strings that have been consed so far.
3415
3416 \f
3417 * Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs
3418 Lisp Manual
3419
3420 +++
3421 ** The user-option `resize-mini-windows' controls how Emacs resizes
3422 mini-windows.
3423
3424 +++
3425 ** The function `pos-visible-in-window-p' now has a third optional
3426 argument, PARTIALLY. If a character is only partially visible, nil is
3427 returned, unless PARTIALLY is non-nil.
3428
3429 ** On window systems, `glyph-table' is no longer used.
3430
3431 +++
3432 ** Help strings in menu items are now used to provide `help-echo' text.
3433
3434 +++
3435 ** The function `image-size' can be used to determine the size of an
3436 image.
3437
3438 - Function: image-size SPEC &optional PIXELS FRAME
3439
3440 Return the size of an image as a pair (WIDTH . HEIGHT).
3441
3442 SPEC is an image specification. PIXELS non-nil means return sizes
3443 measured in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in canonical
3444 character units (fractions of the width/height of the frame's default
3445 font). FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed.
3446 FRAME nil or omitted means use the selected frame.
3447
3448 +++
3449 ** The function `image-mask-p' can be used to determine if an image
3450 has a mask bitmap.
3451
3452 - Function: image-mask-p SPEC &optional FRAME
3453
3454 Return t if image SPEC has a mask bitmap.
3455 FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed. FRAME nil
3456 or omitted means use the selected frame.
3457
3458 +++
3459 ** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image
3460 satisfying one of a list of specifications.
3461
3462 +++
3463 ** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now
3464 optional.
3465
3466 +++
3467 ** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center' (see
3468 below).
3469
3470 \f
3471 * New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
3472
3473 Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
3474 --- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
3475 When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
3476 so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
3477
3478 ** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used
3479 to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs.
3480
3481 Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying
3482 text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground
3483 is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on
3484 your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on
3485 laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to
3486 just display it black instead.
3487
3488 This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put
3489 a line like
3490
3491 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t)
3492
3493 in your `.emacs'.
3494
3495 ** New face implementation.
3496
3497 Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
3498 font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
3499
3500 +++
3501 *** New faces.
3502
3503 Each face can specify the following display attributes:
3504
3505 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
3506
3507 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
3508 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
3509
3510 3. Font height in 1/10pt
3511
3512 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
3513
3514 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
3515
3516 6. Foreground color.
3517
3518 7. Background color.
3519
3520 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
3521
3522 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
3523
3524 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
3525
3526 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
3527
3528 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
3529 color.
3530
3531 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
3532 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
3533
3534 Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
3535 same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
3536 frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
3537 faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
3538 with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each of the face
3539 attributes mentioned above.
3540
3541 There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
3542 definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
3543 created frames.
3544
3545 A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
3546 have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
3547 `fully-specified'.
3548
3549 +++
3550 *** Face merging.
3551
3552 The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
3553 combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
3554 aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
3555 properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
3556 that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
3557 results in a fully-specified face.
3558
3559 +++
3560 *** Face realization.
3561
3562 After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
3563 merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
3564 realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
3565 available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
3566 face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
3567 cache of the frame on which it was realized.
3568
3569 Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
3570 character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
3571 for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
3572 charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
3573
3574 Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
3575 specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
3576 being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
3577 the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
3578 statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
3579
3580 In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
3581 `char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
3582 0x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
3583 the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
3584 initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
3585 Emacs.
3586
3587 Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
3588 `enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
3589 registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
3590 with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
3591
3592 +++
3593 **** Clearing face caches.
3594
3595 The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
3596 on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
3597 unused fonts.
3598
3599 +++
3600 *** Font selection.
3601
3602 Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
3603 given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
3604 for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
3605
3606 If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
3607 pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
3608 family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
3609 property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
3610 an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
3611
3612 Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
3613 against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
3614 match for the given face attributes in this font list.
3615
3616 Font selection can be influenced by the user.
3617
3618 The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
3619 attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
3620 face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
3621 names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
3622 that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
3623 width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
3624 to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
3625
3626 Setting `face-font-family-alternatives' allows the user to specify
3627 alternative font families to try if a family specified by a face
3628 doesn't exist.
3629
3630 Setting `face-font-registry-alternatives' allows the user to specify
3631 all alternative font registry names to try for a face specifying a
3632 registry.
3633
3634 Please note that the interpretations of the above two variables are
3635 slightly different.
3636
3637 Setting face-ignored-fonts allows the user to ignore specific fonts.
3638
3639
3640 +++
3641 **** Scalable fonts
3642
3643 Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
3644 since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
3645 servers.
3646
3647 To enable scalable font use, set the variable
3648 `scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
3649 scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
3650 Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
3651 scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
3652 that list. Example:
3653
3654 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
3655
3656 allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
3657
3658 +++
3659 *** Functions and variables related to font selection.
3660
3661 - Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
3662
3663 Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
3664 is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
3665 string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
3666
3667 If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
3668 the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
3669 FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
3670 POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
3671 SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
3672 These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
3673 if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
3674 REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
3675 the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
3676 of the face font sort order.
3677
3678 - Function: x-font-family-list
3679
3680 Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
3681 omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
3682 (FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
3683 non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
3684
3685 - Variable: font-list-limit
3686
3687 Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
3688 won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
3689 matching font. The default is currently 100.
3690
3691 +++
3692 *** Setting face attributes.
3693
3694 For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
3695 with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
3696 implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
3697 `face-attribute'.
3698
3699 Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
3700 symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
3701
3702 The following attributes are recognized:
3703
3704 `:family'
3705
3706 VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
3707 or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
3708 and `?' are allowed.
3709
3710 `:width'
3711
3712 VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
3713 It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
3714 `condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
3715 `extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
3716
3717 `:height'
3718
3719 VALUE must be either an integer specifying the height of the font to use
3720 in 1/10 pt, a floating point number specifying the amount by which to
3721 scale any underlying face, or a function, which is called with the old
3722 height (from the underlying face), and should return the new height.
3723
3724 `:weight'
3725
3726 VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
3727 symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
3728 `semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
3729
3730 `:slant'
3731
3732 VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
3733 symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
3734 `reverse-oblique'.
3735
3736 `:foreground', `:background'
3737
3738 VALUE must be a color name, a string.
3739
3740 `:underline'
3741
3742 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
3743 VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
3744 a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
3745 don't underline.
3746
3747 `:overline'
3748
3749 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
3750 VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
3751 string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
3752 overline.
3753
3754 `:strike-through'
3755
3756 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
3757 striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
3758 face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
3759 is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
3760
3761 `:box'
3762
3763 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
3764 around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
3765 VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
3766 of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
3767 and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
3768 VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
3769 :color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
3770 the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
3771 specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
3772 defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
3773 the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
3774 color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
3775 should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
3776 like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
3777 that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
3778 the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
3779 box.
3780
3781 `:inverse-video'
3782
3783 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
3784 inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
3785
3786 `:stipple'
3787
3788 If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
3789 The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
3790 searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
3791 HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
3792 is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
3793 explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
3794
3795 For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
3796 and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
3797
3798 `:font'
3799
3800 Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
3801 XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
3802 is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
3803 versions of Emacs.
3804
3805 For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
3806 be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
3807 must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
3808
3809 Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
3810 `defface'.
3811
3812 `:inherit'
3813
3814 VALUE is the name of a face from which to inherit attributes, or a list
3815 of face names. Attributes from inherited faces are merged into the face
3816 like an underlying face would be, with higher priority than underlying faces.
3817
3818 *** Face attributes and X resources
3819
3820 The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
3821 from X resources:
3822
3823 Face attribute X resource class
3824 -----------------------------------------------------------------------
3825 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
3826 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
3827 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
3828 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
3829 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
3830 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
3831 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
3832 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
3833 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
3834 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
3835 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
3836 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
3837 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
3838 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
3839 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
3840 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
3841 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
3842 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
3843 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
3844
3845 +++
3846 *** Text property `face'.
3847
3848 The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
3849 specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
3850 specification can be
3851
3852 1. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
3853
3854 2. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
3855 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
3856 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
3857 for face attribute names.
3858
3859 3. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
3860 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
3861 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
3862
3863 +++
3864 ** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
3865
3866 The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
3867 on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
3868 the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
3869 default. You can get defined colors with a call to
3870 `defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
3871 used to clear the mapping table.
3872
3873 ** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
3874
3875 The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
3876 and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
3877 type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
3878 color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
3879 display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
3880 old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
3881 `x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
3882 compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
3883 should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
3884 modify their color-related behavior.
3885
3886 The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
3887 any frame type.
3888
3889 ** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
3890
3891 The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
3892 `display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
3893 `display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
3894 `display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
3895 `display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
3896 `display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
3897 display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
3898 the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
3899 platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
3900
3901 The new function `display-images-p' returns non-nil if a particular
3902 display can display image files.
3903
3904 +++
3905 ** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
3906
3907 This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
3908 To disallow this completely (like previous versions of emacs), customize
3909 the variable `minibuffer-prompt-properties', and turn on the
3910 `Inviolable' option.
3911
3912 The function minibuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the
3913 end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
3914 Otherwise, it returns zero.
3915
3916 ** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
3917
3918 There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
3919 buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
3920 property (which can be a text property or an overlay).
3921
3922 Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
3923 forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
3924 to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
3925 not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
3926 commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
3927 boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
3928 `inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
3929 functions.
3930
3931 Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
3932 a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
3933 editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
3934
3935 The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
3936
3937 - Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY
3938
3939 Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
3940
3941 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
3942 If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
3943 constrained position if that is different.
3944
3945 If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
3946 positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
3947 ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
3948 constrained to the field that has the same `field' char-property
3949 as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3950 is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
3951 fields. Additionally, if two fields are separated by another field with
3952 the special value `boundary', then any point within this special field is
3953 also considered to be `on the boundary'.
3954
3955 If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
3956 NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
3957 unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
3958 C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
3959 only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
3960
3961 If the optional argument INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY is non-nil, and OLD-POS has
3962 a non-nil property of that name, then any field boundaries are ignored.
3963
3964 Field boundaries are not noticed if `inhibit-field-text-motion' is non-nil.
3965
3966 - Function: delete-field &optional POS
3967
3968 Delete the field surrounding POS.
3969 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
3970 If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3971
3972 - Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3973
3974 Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
3975 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
3976 If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3977 If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the beginning of its
3978 field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
3979
3980 - Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3981
3982 Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
3983 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
3984 If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3985 If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the end of its field,
3986 then the end of the *following* field is returned.
3987
3988 - Function: field-string &optional POS
3989
3990 Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
3991 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
3992 If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3993
3994 - Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
3995
3996 Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
3997 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
3998 If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3999
4000 +++
4001 ** Image support.
4002
4003 Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
4004 strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
4005 (AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
4006 replaces the display of the characters having that property.
4007
4008 If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
4009 `(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
4010 AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
4011 window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
4012 area.
4013
4014 IMAGE is an image specification.
4015
4016 *** Image specifications
4017
4018 Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
4019 is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
4020 specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
4021 symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
4022 described below are ignored.
4023
4024 The following is a list of properties all image types share.
4025
4026 `:ascent ASCENT'
4027
4028 ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'.
4029 If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height
4030 to use for its ascent.
4031
4032 If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the
4033 image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in.
4034
4035 If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a
4036 centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position
4037 of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and
4038 overlays that apply to the image.
4039
4040 `:margin MARGIN'
4041
4042 MARGIN must be either a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put
4043 as margin around the image, or a pair (X . Y) with X specifying the
4044 horizontal margin and Y specifying the vertical margin. Default is 0.
4045
4046 `:relief RELIEF'
4047
4048 RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
4049 around an image.
4050
4051 `:conversion ALGO'
4052
4053 Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it.
4054
4055 ALGO `laplace' or `emboss' means apply a Laplace or ``emboss''
4056 edge-detection algorithm to the image.
4057
4058 ALGO `(edge-detection :matrix MATRIX :color-adjust ADJUST)' means
4059 apply a general edge-detection algorithm. MATRIX must be either a
4060 nine-element list or a nine-element vector of numbers. A pixel at
4061 position x/y in the transformed image is computed from original pixels
4062 around that position. MATRIX specifies, for each pixel in the
4063 neighborhood of x/y, a factor with which that pixel will influence the
4064 transformed pixel; element 0 specifies the factor for the pixel at
4065 x-1/y-1, element 1 the factor for the pixel at x/y-1 etc. as shown
4066 below.
4067
4068 (x-1/y-1 x/y-1 x+1/y-1
4069 x-1/y x/y x+1/y
4070 x-1/y+1 x/y+1 x+1/y+1)
4071
4072 The resulting pixel is computed from the color intensity of the color
4073 resulting from summing up the RGB values of surrounding pixels,
4074 multiplied by the specified factors, and dividing that sum by the sum
4075 of the factors' absolute values.
4076
4077 Laplace edge-detection currently uses a matrix of
4078
4079 (1 0 0
4080 0 0 0
4081 9 9 -1)
4082
4083 Emboss edge-detection uses a matrix of
4084
4085 ( 2 -1 0
4086 -1 0 1
4087 0 1 -2)
4088
4089 ALGO `disabled' means transform the image so that it looks
4090 ``disabled''.
4091
4092 `:mask MASK'
4093
4094 If MASK is `heuristic' or `(heuristic BG)', build a clipping mask for
4095 the image, so that the background of a frame is visible behind the
4096 image. If BG is not specified, or if BG is t, determine the
4097 background color of the image by looking at the 4 corners of the
4098 image, assuming the most frequently occurring color from the corners is
4099 the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must be a list `(RED
4100 GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the background of the
4101 image.
4102
4103 If MASK is nil, remove a mask from the image, if it has one. Images
4104 in some formats include a mask which can be removed by specifying
4105 `:mask nil'.
4106
4107 `:file FILE'
4108
4109 Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
4110 search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
4111 building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
4112 may be present in the image specification.
4113
4114 `:data DATA'
4115
4116 Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
4117 supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
4118 present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
4119 support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
4120
4121 *** Supported image types
4122
4123 **** XBM, image type `xbm'.
4124
4125 XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
4126 properties supported are
4127
4128 `:foreground FG'
4129
4130 FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color, or nil
4131 meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's foreground.
4132
4133 `:background BG'
4134
4135 BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color, or nil
4136 meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's background color.
4137
4138 XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
4139 case, the image specification must contain the following properties
4140 instead of a `:file' property.
4141
4142 `:width WIDTH'
4143
4144 WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
4145
4146 `:height HEIGHT'
4147
4148 HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
4149
4150 `:data DATA'
4151
4152 DATA must be either
4153
4154 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
4155 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
4156
4157 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
4158
4159 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
4160 bitmap.
4161
4162 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor
4163 height may be specified in this case because these are defined
4164 in the file.
4165
4166 **** XPM, image type `xpm'
4167
4168 XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
4169 `xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
4170 found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
4171 `--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
4172
4173 Additional image properties supported are:
4174
4175 `:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
4176
4177 SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
4178 name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
4179 name.
4180
4181 XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
4182 add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
4183
4184 The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
4185 to display compressed images.
4186
4187 **** PBM, image type `pbm'
4188
4189 PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
4190 mono images are supported. Additional image properties supported for
4191 mono images are
4192
4193 `:foreground FG'
4194
4195 FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color, or nil
4196 meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's foreground.
4197
4198 `:background FG'
4199
4200 BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color, or nil
4201 meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's background color.
4202
4203 **** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
4204
4205 Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
4206 package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties
4207 are:
4208
4209 **** TIFF, image type `tiff'
4210
4211 Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
4212 package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
4213 properties defined.
4214
4215 **** GIF, image type `gif'
4216
4217 Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
4218 `libungif-4.1.0', or later.
4219
4220 Additional image properties supported are:
4221
4222 `:index INDEX'
4223
4224 INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
4225 multi-image GIF file. An error is signaled if INDEX is too large.
4226
4227 This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
4228 For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
4229 at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
4230 every 0.1 seconds.
4231
4232 (defun show-anim (file max)
4233 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
4234 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
4235
4236 (defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
4237 (when (= idx max)
4238 (setq idx 0))
4239 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
4240 (save-excursion
4241 (set-buffer buffer)
4242 (goto-char (point-min))
4243 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
4244 (insert-image img "x"))
4245 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
4246
4247 **** PNG, image type `png'
4248
4249 Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
4250 package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
4251 properties defined.
4252
4253 **** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
4254
4255 Additional image properties supported are:
4256
4257 `:pt-width WIDTH'
4258
4259 WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
4260 integer. This is a required property.
4261
4262 `:pt-height HEIGHT'
4263
4264 HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
4265 must be a integer. This is an required property.
4266
4267 `:bounding-box BOX'
4268
4269 BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
4270 the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
4271 files. This is an required property.
4272
4273 Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
4274 lisp/gs.el.
4275
4276 *** Lisp interface.
4277
4278 The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
4279 which are supported in the current configuration.
4280
4281 Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
4282 they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
4283 The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
4284 manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all
4285 images with `equal' specifications share the same image.
4286
4287 *** Simplified image API, image.el
4288
4289 The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
4290 creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
4291 can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
4292 define an image based on available image types. The functions
4293 `put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
4294 buffer.
4295
4296 +++
4297 ** Display margins.
4298
4299 Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
4300 and images.
4301
4302 To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
4303 `left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
4304 `set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
4305 obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
4306 `right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
4307 the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
4308 of the display margins.
4309
4310 You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
4311 containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
4312 one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
4313 string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
4314 in this file).
4315
4316 +++
4317 ** Help display
4318
4319 Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
4320 moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
4321 `help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
4322 that have a `help-echo' property.
4323
4324 If the value of the `help-echo' property is a function, that function
4325 is called with three arguments WINDOW, OBJECT and POSITION. WINDOW is
4326 the window in which the help was found.
4327
4328 If OBJECT is a buffer, POS is the position in the buffer where the
4329 `help-echo' text property was found.
4330
4331 If OBJECT is an overlay, that overlay has a `help-echo' property, and
4332 POS is the position in the overlay's buffer under the mouse.
4333
4334 If OBJECT is a string (an overlay string or a string displayed with
4335 the `display' property), POS is the position in that string under the
4336 mouse.
4337
4338 If the value of the `help-echo' property is neither a function nor a
4339 string, it is evaluated to obtain a help string.
4340
4341 For tool-bar and menu-bar items, their key definition is used to
4342 determine the help to display. If their definition contains a
4343 property `:help FORM', FORM is evaluated to determine the help string.
4344 For tool-bar items without a help form, the caption of the item is
4345 used as help string.
4346
4347 The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
4348 the help string differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window
4349 causes the help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
4350
4351 +++
4352 ** Vertical fractional scrolling.
4353
4354 The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
4355 This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
4356
4357 The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
4358 scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
4359 The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
4360 scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
4361 used.
4362
4363 (global-set-key [A-down]
4364 #'(lambda ()
4365 (interactive)
4366 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
4367 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
4368 (global-set-key [A-up]
4369 #'(lambda ()
4370 (interactive)
4371 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
4372 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
4373
4374 +++
4375 ** New hook `fontification-functions'.
4376
4377 Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
4378 when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
4379 variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
4380 is called with one argument, POS.
4381
4382 At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
4383 characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
4384 as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
4385 property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
4386 `fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
4387
4388 +++
4389 ** Tool bar support.
4390
4391 Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
4392 parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
4393 controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
4394 suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
4395 `auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
4396 automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
4397
4398 *** Tool bar item definitions
4399
4400 Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
4401 `tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
4402 where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
4403
4404 CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
4405 evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
4406 the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
4407 property (see below).
4408
4409 BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
4410 binding are currently ignored.
4411
4412 The following properties are recognized:
4413
4414 `:enable FORM'.
4415
4416 FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
4417 or disabled.
4418
4419 `:visible FORM'
4420
4421 FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
4422
4423 `:filter FUNCTION'
4424
4425 FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
4426 FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
4427 used instead of BINDING to display this item.
4428
4429 `:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
4430
4431 TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
4432 and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
4433
4434 `:image IMAGES'
4435
4436 IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
4437 image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
4438 meaning of each of the four elements:
4439
4440 Index Use when item is
4441 ----------------------------------------
4442 0 enabled and selected
4443 1 enabled and deselected
4444 2 disabled and selected
4445 3 disabled and deselected
4446
4447 If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection
4448 algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state.
4449
4450 `:help HELP-STRING'.
4451
4452 Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
4453 is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
4454
4455 The function `toolbar-add-item' is a convenience function for adding
4456 toolbar items generally, and `tool-bar-add-item-from-menu' can be used
4457 to define a toolbar item with a binding copied from an item on the
4458 menu bar.
4459
4460 The default bindings use a menu-item :filter to derive the tool-bar
4461 dynamically from variable `tool-bar-map' which may be set
4462 buffer-locally to override the global map.
4463
4464 *** Tool-bar-related variables.
4465
4466 If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
4467 resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
4468 than 1/4 of the frame's size.
4469
4470 If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
4471 raised when the mouse moves over them.
4472
4473 You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
4474 `tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
4475 pixels, or a pair of integers (X . Y) specifying horizontal and
4476 vertical margins . Default is 1.
4477
4478 You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
4479 `tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
4480
4481 *** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
4482
4483 You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
4484 a tool bar item. If
4485
4486 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
4487 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
4488 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
4489
4490 is the original tool bar item definition, then
4491
4492 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
4493
4494 makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
4495 item.
4496
4497 ** Mode line changes.
4498
4499 +++
4500 *** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
4501
4502 The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
4503 that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
4504 a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
4505
4506 1. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
4507 a `local-map' text property.
4508
4509 2. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
4510 that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
4511
4512 3. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
4513 is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
4514 `local-map' property.
4515
4516 The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
4517 properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
4518 example.
4519
4520 *** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
4521 evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
4522
4523 +++
4524 *** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
4525 variable mode-line-format to nil.
4526
4527 +++
4528 *** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
4529
4530 This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
4531 `header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
4532 completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
4533 `default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
4534 line.
4535
4536 The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
4537 `header-line'.
4538
4539 The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
4540 position in the header-line.
4541
4542 +++
4543 ** Text property `display'
4544
4545 The `display' text property is used to insert images into text,
4546 replace text with other text, display text in marginal area, and it is
4547 also used to control other aspects of how text displays. The value of
4548 the `display' property should be a display specification, as described
4549 below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
4550
4551 *** Replacing text, displaying text in marginal areas
4552
4553 To replace the text having the `display' property with some other
4554 text, use a display specification of the form `(LOCATION STRING)'.
4555
4556 If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', STRING is displayed in the left
4557 marginal area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in
4558 the right marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' STRING
4559 is displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
4560 simpler form STRING as property value.
4561
4562 *** Variable width and height spaces
4563
4564 To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
4565 specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
4566 `(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
4567 area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
4568 marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
4569 displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
4570 simpler form STRETCH as property value.
4571
4572 The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
4573 PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
4574 properties described below.
4575
4576 The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
4577 characters having the `display' property.
4578
4579 - :width WIDTH
4580
4581 Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
4582 character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
4583
4584 - :relative-width FACTOR
4585
4586 Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
4587 first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
4588 same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
4589 width of that character by FACTOR.
4590
4591 - :align-to HPOS
4592
4593 Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
4594 value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
4595
4596 Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
4597
4598 - :height HEIGHT
4599
4600 Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
4601 normal line height.
4602
4603 - :relative-height FACTOR
4604
4605 The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
4606 of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
4607
4608 - :ascent ASCENT
4609
4610 Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
4611 used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
4612 baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
4613 equal to 100.
4614
4615 You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
4616
4617 *** Images
4618
4619 A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
4620 . IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
4621 in the display, the characters having this display specification in
4622 their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
4623 the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
4624 `(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
4625 area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
4626 the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
4627 as display specification.
4628
4629 *** Other display properties
4630
4631 - (space-width FACTOR)
4632
4633 Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
4634 should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
4635 integer or float.
4636
4637 - (height HEIGHT)
4638
4639 Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
4640
4641 If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
4642 means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
4643 the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
4644 ``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
4645 a font is available counts as a step.
4646
4647 If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
4648 as tall as the frame's default font.
4649
4650 If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
4651 height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
4652
4653 Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
4654 `height' bound to the current specified font height.
4655
4656 - (raise FACTOR)
4657
4658 FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
4659 font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
4660 raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
4661 amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
4662 `height' subproperty.
4663
4664 *** Conditional display properties
4665
4666 All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
4667 has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC
4668 applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated.
4669 During evaluation, point is temporarily set to the end position of
4670 the text having the `display' property.
4671
4672 The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
4673 `(:when t SPEC)'.
4674
4675 +++
4676 ** New menu separator types.
4677
4678 Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
4679 item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
4680 treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
4681 to specify other menu separator types.
4682
4683 - `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
4684
4685 No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
4686 separator occurs.
4687
4688 - `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
4689
4690 A single line in the menu's foreground color.
4691
4692 - `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
4693
4694 A double line in the menu's foreground color.
4695
4696 - `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
4697
4698 A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
4699
4700 - `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
4701
4702 A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
4703
4704 - `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
4705
4706 A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the form
4707 displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
4708
4709 - `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
4710
4711 A single line with 3D raised appearance.
4712
4713 - `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
4714
4715 A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
4716
4717 - `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
4718
4719 A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
4720
4721 - `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
4722
4723 Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
4724
4725 - `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
4726
4727 Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
4728
4729 - `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
4730
4731 Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
4732
4733 - `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
4734
4735 Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
4736
4737 Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
4738 the corresponding single-line separators.
4739
4740 +++
4741 ** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
4742
4743 The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
4744 `scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
4745 Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
4746 that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
4747 default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
4748 default background is the background color of the frame, and the
4749 default foreground is black.
4750
4751 The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
4752 (class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
4753 `ScrollBarBackground').
4754
4755 Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
4756 settings for scroll bar colors.
4757
4758 +++
4759 ** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
4760 display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
4761
4762 ---
4763 ** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
4764 starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
4765 on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
4766 line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
4767 the original window start.
4768
4769 ---
4770 ** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
4771 `hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
4772 now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
4773
4774 +++
4775 ** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
4776
4777 A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
4778 `window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
4779 windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
4780 other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
4781
4782 The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
4783 fixed-width and fixed-height.
4784
4785 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
4786
4787 A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
4788 fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
4789 window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
4790 change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
4791 temporarily to nil, for example
4792
4793 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
4794 (enlarge-window 10))
4795
4796 Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
4797 or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
4798
4799 ** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS
4800 terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape
4801 to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter
4802 overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is
4803 horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't
4804 support a vertical-bar cursor).
4805
4806
4807 \f
4808 * Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes
4809
4810 ** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard
4811 input.
4812
4813 ** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos.
4814
4815 ** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages.
4816
4817 ** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not
4818 only for character input, but also in incremental search. The
4819 exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets
4820 (e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence
4821 (e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search.
4822
4823 ** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has
4824 been added.
4825
4826 \f
4827 * Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change
4828
4829 ** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added.
4830
4831
4832 \f
4833 * Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
4834
4835 ** Not new, but not mentioned before:
4836 M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
4837 \f
4838 * Changes in Emacs 20.4
4839
4840 ** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
4841
4842 You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
4843 Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
4844 `.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
4845
4846 If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
4847 is the one that is used.
4848
4849 ** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
4850 the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
4851 Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
4852 separate from the command's regular output.
4853 Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
4854 says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
4855 In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
4856 the buffer name.
4857
4858 When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
4859 output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
4860 it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
4861 cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
4862
4863 ** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
4864 the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
4865 is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
4866 created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
4867
4868 ** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
4869 example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
4870 match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
4871 quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
4872
4873 ** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
4874 now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
4875 if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
4876 they never ignore case.
4877
4878 ** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
4879 under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
4880 applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
4881 of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
4882 just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
4883 convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
4884 part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
4885
4886 If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
4887 the same format that was used in the file before.
4888
4889 You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
4890 `inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
4891
4892 ** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
4893 renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
4894 This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
4895
4896 ** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
4897 The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
4898 buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
4899 your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
4900 is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
4901 end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
4902 Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
4903
4904 The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
4905 eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
4906 control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
4907 format. You can now customize these variables.
4908
4909 ** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
4910 filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
4911 filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
4912 enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
4913
4914 ** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
4915 in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
4916 windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
4917
4918 ** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
4919 dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
4920 doesn't have any effect.
4921
4922 ** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
4923 not one per buffer.
4924
4925 ** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
4926 use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
4927 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
4928
4929 ** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
4930 To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
4931 `auto-show-mode' command.
4932
4933 ** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
4934 avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
4935 versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
4936 choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
4937 occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
4938
4939 ** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
4940 cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
4941
4942 ** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
4943 character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
4944 feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
4945
4946 ** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
4947 the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
4948 interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
4949 and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
4950
4951 ** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
4952
4953 The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
4954 that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
4955 one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
4956 codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
4957 set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
4958
4959 Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
4960 from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
4961
4962 IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
4963 equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
4964 a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
4965 `?' on other systems.
4966
4967 IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
4968 feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
4969 Unix.
4970
4971 Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
4972 current codepage when it starts.
4973
4974 ** Mail changes
4975
4976 *** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
4977 `mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
4978 appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
4979 non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
4980 MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
4981 headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
4982 latin-1:
4983
4984 MIME-version: 1.0
4985 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
4986 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
4987
4988 *** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
4989 default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
4990 default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
4991 sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
4992 buffer-file-coding-system.
4993
4994 You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
4995 sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
4996 mail.
4997
4998 *** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
4999 if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
5000 Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
5001 list of possible coding systems.
5002
5003 ** CC Mode changes
5004
5005 *** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
5006 modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
5007 longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
5008 docstring for details.
5009
5010 *** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
5011 symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
5012 found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
5013 prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
5014 lineup functions use this feature currently.
5015
5016 *** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
5017 "finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
5018
5019 *** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
5020 "catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
5021
5022 *** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
5023 from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
5024 symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
5025 c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
5026 anonymous classes.
5027
5028 *** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
5029 syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
5030
5031 *** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
5032 inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
5033 support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
5034 function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
5035
5036 *** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
5037 (i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
5038 brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
5039 c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
5040 (brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
5041
5042 *** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
5043
5044 *** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
5045
5046 *** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
5047 for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
5048
5049 *** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
5050
5051 *** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
5052 associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
5053 This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
5054 circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
5055 class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
5056
5057 ** Gnus changes.
5058
5059 *** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
5060 added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
5061 Gnus manual for the full story.
5062
5063 *** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
5064 before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
5065 group, which is created automatically.
5066
5067 *** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
5068 values.
5069
5070 *** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
5071
5072 *** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
5073 outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
5074
5075 *** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
5076 `C-u C-c C-c'.
5077
5078 *** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
5079
5080 *** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
5081 re-highlighting of the article buffer.
5082
5083 *** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
5084
5085 *** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
5086 Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
5087
5088 *** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
5089 `a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
5090
5091 *** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
5092 control over simplification.
5093
5094 *** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
5095
5096 *** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
5097 limit.
5098
5099 *** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
5100
5101 *** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
5102
5103 *** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
5104 If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
5105 rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
5106
5107 *** Canceling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
5108 `a' forces normal posting method.
5109
5110 *** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
5111 -- `W d'.
5112
5113 *** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
5114 to a non-nil value.
5115
5116 *** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
5117 where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
5118
5119 *** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
5120 has been added.
5121
5122 *** A history of where mails have been split is available.
5123
5124 *** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
5125
5126 *** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
5127 `gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
5128
5129 *** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
5130 `message-cite-original-without-signature'.
5131
5132 *** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
5133
5134 *** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
5135 been added.
5136
5137 *** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
5138 `gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
5139
5140 *** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
5141 updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
5142
5143 *** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
5144
5145 *** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
5146
5147 *** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
5148
5149 ** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
5150
5151 *** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
5152 options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
5153 nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
5154
5155 *** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
5156 TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
5157 of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
5158 TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
5159 can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
5160
5161 *** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
5162 All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
5163 but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
5164 the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
5165
5166 *** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
5167 the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
5168 buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
5169 mismatch.
5170
5171 ** Changes to RefTeX mode
5172
5173 *** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
5174 file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
5175
5176 *** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
5177 lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
5178 characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
5179 removed from the label.
5180
5181 *** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
5182 a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
5183
5184 *** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
5185 customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
5186
5187 *** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
5188 `reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
5189 expressions.
5190
5191 *** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
5192
5193 ** New/deleted modes and packages
5194
5195 *** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
5196 SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
5197
5198 *** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
5199 editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
5200 SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
5201
5202 *** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
5203 changes with a special face.
5204
5205 *** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
5206 this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
5207 Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
5208 \f
5209 * MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
5210
5211 ** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
5212 This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
5213 conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
5214 and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
5215 check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
5216
5217 The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
5218 Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
5219 distribution when the config.bat script is run.
5220
5221 ** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
5222 MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
5223 controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
5224 directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
5225 Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
5226 on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
5227 string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
5228 program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
5229 printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
5230
5231 ** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
5232 output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
5233 available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
5234 input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
5235 temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
5236 program.
5237
5238 An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
5239 and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
5240 programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
5241 automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
5242 as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
5243 ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
5244
5245 ** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
5246 a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
5247 MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
5248 was not documented clearly before.
5249
5250 ** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
5251 This includes Tetris and Snake.
5252 \f
5253 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
5254
5255 ** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
5256 return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
5257 They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
5258 meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
5259
5260 ** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
5261 WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
5262 and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
5263
5264 ** Changes in the file-attributes function.
5265
5266 *** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
5267 It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
5268
5269 *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
5270 the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
5271 integers.
5272
5273 ** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
5274 files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
5275 arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
5276 file names and attributes are returned.
5277
5278 ** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
5279 sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
5280 accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its attributes.
5281 It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
5282 returns the result.
5283
5284 ** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
5285 to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
5286
5287 ** New functions for base64 conversion:
5288
5289 The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
5290 into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
5291 performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
5292 optionally.
5293
5294 Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
5295 job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
5296
5297 **
5298 The new function process-running-child-p
5299 will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
5300 terminal to its own child process.
5301
5302 ** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
5303 when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
5304 to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
5305 itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
5306
5307 ** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
5308 be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
5309
5310 ** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
5311 :included is an alias for :visible.
5312
5313 easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
5314 easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
5315 to move or copy menu entries.
5316
5317 ** Multibyte editing changes
5318
5319 *** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
5320 an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
5321 make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
5322 work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
5323 char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
5324 (setq char (sref str idx)
5325 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
5326 The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
5327
5328 If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
5329 (say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
5330 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
5331
5332 *** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
5333 region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
5334 deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
5335
5336 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibited
5337
5338 This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
5339 across the boundary.
5340
5341 *** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
5342 `unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
5343 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
5344 contains 8-bit characters.
5345 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
5346 contains invalid characters.
5347
5348 *** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
5349 text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
5350 preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
5351 text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
5352 way.
5353
5354 *** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
5355 If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
5356 end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
5357 prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
5358
5359 *** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
5360 compose Thai characters in a string.
5361
5362 ** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
5363 argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
5364 for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
5365 menus should always use the third argument.
5366
5367 ** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
5368 read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
5369 arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
5370 input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
5371
5372 ** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
5373 of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
5374 programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
5375 inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
5376
5377 ** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
5378 the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
5379 returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
5380 echo area contents.
5381
5382 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
5383
5384 ** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
5385 NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
5386 requested feature cannot be loaded.
5387
5388 ** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
5389 foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
5390 means to clear out that attribute.
5391
5392 ** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
5393 gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
5394
5395 ** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
5396 read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
5397 unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
5398 end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
5399
5400 ** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
5401 the gap of the current buffer.
5402
5403 ** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
5404 to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
5405 current buffer.
5406
5407 ** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
5408 facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
5409 These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
5410 it back in after any modifications have been made.
5411 \f
5412 * Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
5413
5414 ** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
5415 the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
5416 /usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
5417 directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
5418 subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
5419
5420 Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
5421 names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
5422 Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
5423 which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
5424 these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
5425
5426 Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
5427 starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
5428 time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
5429
5430 This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
5431 Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
5432 to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
5433 subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
5434 `.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
5435 results.
5436
5437 ** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
5438 GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
5439 that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
5440 fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
5441 \f
5442 * Changes in Emacs 20.3
5443
5444 ** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
5445 including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
5446 it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
5447 perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
5448
5449 ** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
5450 specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
5451 region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
5452 further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
5453 command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
5454 within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
5455 are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
5456 region.
5457
5458 In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
5459 selective undo.
5460
5461 ** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
5462 unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
5463 buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
5464 effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
5465 Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
5466
5467 The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
5468 though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
5469 -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
5470 load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
5471
5472 ** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
5473 no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
5474 enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
5475 something that most users not do.
5476
5477 ** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
5478 operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
5479 The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
5480 applications.
5481
5482 C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
5483 pasting operations.
5484
5485 ** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
5486 setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
5487 like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
5488 printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
5489 `ps-printer-name'.
5490
5491 ** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
5492 minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
5493 any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
5494 except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
5495 incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
5496 hits a new word.
5497
5498 Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
5499 Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
5500 to be confused by TeX commands.
5501
5502 You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
5503 correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
5504 clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
5505 of various alternative replacements and actions.
5506
5507 Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
5508 the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
5509 corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
5510 alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
5511 flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
5512
5513 Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
5514 flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
5515
5516 ** Changes in input method usage.
5517
5518 Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
5519 the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
5520 respectively.
5521
5522 You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
5523
5524 If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
5525 of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
5526
5527 The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
5528 that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
5529
5530 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
5531
5532 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
5533
5534 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
5535 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
5536
5537 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
5538 given in the following case:
5539 o When you are using a complex input method.
5540 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
5541
5542 If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
5543 input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
5544 and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
5545 setting it to t is helpful.
5546
5547 The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
5548
5549 In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
5550 keys:
5551 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
5552 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
5553 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
5554 These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
5555 environment.
5556
5557 ** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
5558 names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
5559 minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
5560 get
5561
5562 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
5563
5564 which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
5565
5566 Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
5567 Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
5568
5569 ** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
5570 at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
5571 its owner and group.
5572
5573 ** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
5574 Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
5575
5576 ** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
5577 contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
5578
5579 ** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
5580 which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
5581 in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
5582 by the left edge of the rectangle.
5583
5584 ** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
5585 increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
5586 C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
5587 for writing keyboard macros.
5588
5589 ** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
5590 files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
5591 frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
5592 the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
5593 additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
5594 info.
5595
5596 ** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
5597
5598 ** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
5599 query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
5600 contents only.
5601
5602 ** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
5603 confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
5604 the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
5605 says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
5606
5607 ** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
5608 non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
5609 literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
5610
5611 ** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
5612 now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
5613 Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
5614 inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
5615
5616 ** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
5617 failure if the command produces no output.
5618
5619 ** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
5620 manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
5621 the mouse.
5622
5623 ** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
5624 mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
5625 function and variable names.
5626
5627 ** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
5628 reading specific files. This has higher priority than
5629 file-coding-system-alist.
5630
5631 ** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
5632 t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
5633 converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
5634 the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
5635 according to the current fontset.
5636
5637 ** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
5638
5639 The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
5640 that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
5641 nonascii-insert-offset.
5642
5643 For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
5644 enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
5645 nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
5646 characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
5647
5648 ** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
5649 an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
5650
5651 ** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
5652 letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
5653
5654 ** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
5655 are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
5656 command keys.
5657
5658 ** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
5659 user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
5660
5661 Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
5662 user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
5663 all variables that have documentation.
5664
5665 ** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
5666 shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
5667 that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
5668 minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
5669 it should show; the default is 20.
5670
5671 Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
5672 the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
5673 of your input.
5674
5675 ** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
5676 all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
5677 recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
5678 argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
5679 the customizable options which were changed since that version.
5680 Newly added options are included as well.
5681
5682 If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
5683 then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
5684 for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
5685
5686 This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
5687 Customize menu.
5688
5689 ** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
5690 the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
5691
5692 ** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
5693 buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
5694 invoked.
5695
5696 ** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
5697 that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
5698 The default is 1.
5699
5700 ** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
5701 syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
5702 new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
5703 (C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
5704 sensibly.
5705
5706 ** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
5707
5708 ** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
5709 value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
5710 two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
5711
5712 ** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
5713 reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
5714 for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
5715 every night.
5716
5717 ** Desktop changes
5718
5719 *** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
5720 the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
5721
5722 *** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored
5723 and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'.
5724
5725 ** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
5726 read and post multi-lingual articles.
5727
5728 ** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
5729 doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
5730 be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
5731 outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
5732 the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
5733 made invisible again.
5734
5735 ** Mail reading and sending changes
5736
5737 *** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
5738 the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
5739 changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
5740 toggle.
5741
5742 *** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
5743 now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
5744 summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
5745 the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
5746 rmail-default-body-file.
5747
5748 *** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
5749 longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
5750 handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
5751
5752 *** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
5753 it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
5754 is evaluated to insert the signature.
5755
5756 *** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
5757 outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
5758 handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
5759 putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
5760 transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
5761 especially interested in trying feedmail.
5762
5763 feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
5764 feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
5765 provided by feedmail are:
5766
5767 **** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
5768 stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
5769 there is also a queue for draft messages
5770
5771 **** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
5772 be prompted for confirmation
5773
5774 **** does smart filling of address headers
5775
5776 **** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
5777 the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
5778 can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
5779
5780 **** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
5781 the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
5782 /usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
5783 function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
5784
5785 ** Dired changes
5786
5787 *** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
5788 files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
5789
5790 *** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
5791 run Dired on the directory name at point.
5792
5793 *** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
5794 files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
5795 for a specified regexp.
5796
5797 ** VC Changes
5798
5799 *** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
5800 conveniently.
5801
5802 *** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
5803 faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
5804 Dired.
5805
5806 VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
5807 directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
5808 listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
5809 currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
5810
5811 You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
5812 then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
5813 vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
5814 control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
5815 on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
5816
5817 All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
5818 is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
5819 `v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
5820 the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
5821 `vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
5822
5823 The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
5824 toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
5825 VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
5826 `* l', to mark all files currently locked.
5827
5828 Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
5829 ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
5830 command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
5831
5832 *** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
5833 file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
5834 session to resolve them.
5835
5836 Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
5837 resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
5838 contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
5839 uses as well).
5840
5841 *** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
5842 command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
5843 you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
5844 either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
5845 branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
5846 If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
5847 using ediff.
5848
5849 ** Changes in Font Lock
5850
5851 *** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
5852 are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
5853 use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
5854 unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
5855 compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
5856
5857 ** Frame name display changes
5858
5859 *** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
5860 frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
5861 raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
5862 when many frames are invisible or iconified.
5863
5864 *** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
5865 frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
5866 menu.
5867
5868 ** Comint (subshell) changes
5869
5870 *** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
5871 subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
5872 with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
5873
5874 *** There are new commands in Comint mode.
5875
5876 C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
5877 that is, the line after the last line you got.
5878 You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
5879
5880 C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
5881 send the current line together with the following line, when you send
5882 the following line.
5883
5884 C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
5885 which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
5886 previously sent input.
5887
5888 C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
5889 it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
5890 as the search string.
5891
5892 *** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
5893 automatically in compilation-mode windows.
5894
5895 ** C mode changes
5896
5897 *** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
5898 and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
5899 assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
5900 definition.
5901
5902 *** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
5903 (i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
5904 Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
5905 style is still the default however.
5906
5907 *** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
5908
5909 *** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
5910 are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
5911 them. They do not have key bindings by default.
5912
5913 *** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
5914 and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
5915
5916 *** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
5917 namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
5918
5919 *** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
5920 makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
5921
5922 *** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
5923 c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
5924
5925 *** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
5926 should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
5927 package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
5928 variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
5929
5930 ** Changes to hippie-expand.
5931
5932 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
5933 non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
5934 which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
5935
5936 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
5937 non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
5938 expanding dynamically.
5939
5940 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
5941 non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
5942
5943 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
5944 non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
5945 this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
5946 expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
5947
5948 *** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
5949
5950 ** Changes in BibTeX mode.
5951
5952 *** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
5953 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
5954 automatic key generation. This replaces variable
5955 bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
5956 against the first word in the title.
5957
5958 *** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
5959 capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
5960 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
5961 lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
5962 lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
5963 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
5964
5965 *** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
5966 generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
5967 replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
5968 bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
5969
5970 ** Changes in vcursor.el.
5971
5972 *** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
5973 and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
5974 variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
5975 entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
5976 `vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
5977 in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
5978
5979 *** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
5980 Editing group once the package is loaded.
5981
5982 *** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
5983 generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
5984 vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behavior.
5985
5986 *** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
5987 vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
5988
5989 ** Ispell changes.
5990
5991 *** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
5992 buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
5993 are identified by syntax tables in effect.
5994
5995 *** Generic region skipping implemented.
5996 A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
5997 and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
5998 defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
5999 include:
6000
6001 o URLs are automatically skipped
6002 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
6003
6004 *** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
6005
6006 ** Changes to RefTeX mode
6007
6008 RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
6009 large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
6010 re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
6011 section `Optimizations' in the manual.
6012
6013 *** New recursive parser.
6014
6015 The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
6016 entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
6017 recursive parser scans the individual files.
6018
6019 *** Parsing only part of a document.
6020
6021 Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
6022 partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
6023 the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
6024
6025 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
6026
6027 *** Storing parsing information in a file.
6028
6029 This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
6030
6031 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
6032
6033 *** Using multiple selection buffers
6034
6035 If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
6036 for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
6037
6038 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
6039
6040 *** References to external documents.
6041
6042 The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
6043 documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
6044 documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
6045 macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
6046 RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
6047 the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
6048 The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
6049
6050 *** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
6051
6052 The built-in command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
6053 and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
6054
6055 Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
6056 the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
6057
6058 *** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
6059
6060 The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
6061 buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
6062
6063 *** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
6064
6065 The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
6066 contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
6067 `reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
6068 have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
6069 enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
6070 at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
6071 more.
6072
6073 *** Support for the varioref package
6074
6075 The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
6076
6077 *** New hooks
6078
6079 Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
6080 and citations are created. These hooks are
6081 `reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
6082 `reftex-format-cite-function'.
6083
6084 *** Citations outside LaTeX
6085
6086 The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
6087 a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
6088
6089 *** Short context is no longer fontified.
6090
6091 The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
6092 fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
6093 fontified, use
6094
6095 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
6096
6097 ** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
6098 With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
6099 the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
6100 directories that contain the same file name.
6101
6102 Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
6103 Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
6104 file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
6105 Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
6106 have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
6107 names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
6108 directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
6109 directory.
6110
6111 ** New modes and packages
6112
6113 *** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
6114 It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
6115 it, but some do not.
6116
6117 *** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
6118 code.
6119
6120 *** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
6121 current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
6122 around in a buffer.
6123
6124 Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
6125
6126 *** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
6127 uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
6128 be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
6129 established system of notation similar to Chess.
6130
6131 *** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
6132 documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
6133 guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
6134
6135 *** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
6136 available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
6137 system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
6138 simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
6139 functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
6140 the like.
6141
6142 *** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
6143 identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
6144
6145 *** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
6146 within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
6147 used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
6148 the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
6149
6150 *** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
6151
6152 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
6153 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
6154 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
6155 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
6156 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
6157 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
6158 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
6159 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
6160 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
6161 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
6162 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
6163
6164 Platform-specific modes:
6165
6166 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
6167 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
6168 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
6169 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
6170 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
6171 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
6172 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
6173 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
6174 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
6175 \f
6176 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
6177
6178 ** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
6179 use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
6180 That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
6181 Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
6182
6183 Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
6184 you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
6185 consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
6186
6187 ** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
6188 and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
6189 specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
6190 searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
6191
6192 ** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
6193 multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
6194 character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
6195 environment.
6196
6197 ** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
6198 take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
6199 string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
6200 current input method for reading this one event.
6201
6202 ** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
6203 now control whether to output certain characters as
6204 backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
6205 non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
6206 characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
6207 in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
6208 \f
6209 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
6210
6211 ** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
6212 of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
6213
6214 ** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
6215 in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
6216 always increases point by 1.
6217
6218 The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
6219 considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
6220
6221 See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
6222
6223 ** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
6224 Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
6225 default value changed. For example,
6226
6227 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
6228 :type 'integer
6229 :group 'foo
6230 :version "20.3")
6231
6232 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
6233 :version "20.3")
6234
6235 If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
6236 default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
6237 is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
6238 `:version' in the top level group.
6239
6240 This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
6241
6242 ** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
6243 starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
6244
6245 However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
6246 symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
6247 support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
6248 to themselves.
6249
6250 If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
6251 this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
6252 values whatever.
6253
6254 ** There is a new debugger command, R.
6255 It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
6256 in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
6257
6258 ** Frame-local variables.
6259
6260 You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
6261 the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
6262 local bindings for that variable.
6263
6264 These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
6265 frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
6266 modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
6267 parameter name.
6268
6269 Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
6270 Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
6271 active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
6272 that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
6273
6274 It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
6275 clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
6276 very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
6277 through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
6278
6279 ** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
6280 "symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
6281 evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
6282 makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
6283 See the documentation in sregex.el.
6284
6285 ** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
6286 is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
6287 parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
6288 The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
6289
6290 ** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
6291 If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
6292
6293 ** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
6294 known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
6295 define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
6296
6297 ** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
6298 when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
6299 it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
6300 history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
6301
6302 The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
6303 return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
6304 empty input.
6305
6306 ** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
6307 for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
6308 `iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
6309 Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
6310 `read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
6311
6312 ** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
6313 echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
6314 a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
6315 default password to use if the user enters nothing.
6316
6317 ** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
6318 specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
6319 function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
6320 place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
6321 non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
6322
6323 ** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
6324 If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
6325 up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
6326 end of the window, even if this requires computation.
6327
6328 ** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
6329 which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
6330 If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
6331
6332 ** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
6333 holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
6334 was directed to display this buffer.
6335
6336 ** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
6337 with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
6338 describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
6339 other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
6340 set-window-configuration.
6341
6342 ** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
6343 window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
6344 positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
6345 windows and the choice of buffers to display.
6346
6347 ** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
6348 override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
6349 look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
6350
6351 If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
6352 non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
6353 map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
6354
6355 minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
6356 and it is meant to be set by major modes.
6357
6358 ** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
6359 except that it discards all text properties from the result.
6360
6361 ** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
6362 USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
6363 floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
6364
6365 ** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
6366 to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
6367 in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
6368 it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
6369
6370 ** Menu changes
6371
6372 *** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
6373 keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
6374 better supported.
6375
6376 The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
6377 a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
6378 you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
6379 can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
6380 then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
6381
6382 *** A new format for menu items is supported.
6383
6384 In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
6385 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
6386 defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
6387 starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
6388
6389 The format is:
6390 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
6391 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
6392 where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
6393 string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
6394 The supported properties include
6395
6396 :enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
6397 item is enabled.
6398 :visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
6399 item should appear in the menu.
6400 :filter FILTER-FN
6401 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
6402 which will be REAL-BINDING.
6403 It should return a binding to use instead.
6404 :keys DESCRIPTION
6405 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
6406 binding for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
6407 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
6408 :key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
6409 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
6410 keyboard binding.
6411 :key-sequence nil
6412 This means that the command normally has no
6413 keyboard equivalent.
6414 :help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
6415 :button (TYPE . SELECTED)
6416 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
6417 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
6418 value says whether this button is currently selected.
6419
6420 Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
6421 Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
6422
6423 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
6424
6425 ** New event types
6426
6427 *** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
6428 mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
6429 corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
6430 which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
6431
6432 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
6433
6434 where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
6435 same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
6436 indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
6437 negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
6438 the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
6439 forward, away from the user.
6440
6441 As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
6442
6443 *** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
6444 files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
6445 and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
6446 filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
6447 loaded into Emacs. The format is:
6448
6449 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
6450
6451 where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
6452 same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
6453 that were dragged and dropped.
6454
6455 As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
6456
6457 ** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
6458
6459 *** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
6460 any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
6461 to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
6462
6463 *** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
6464 can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
6465 that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
6466
6467 *** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
6468 in Emacs 19 and before.
6469
6470 The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
6471 The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
6472
6473 *** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
6474 buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
6475 unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
6476 representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
6477
6478 This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
6479 as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
6480 viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
6481 one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
6482 will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
6483
6484 This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
6485 representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
6486 (including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
6487 consistent with the new representation.
6488
6489 *** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
6490 representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
6491 about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
6492 however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
6493
6494 The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
6495 nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
6496 using the table nonascii-translation-table.
6497
6498 *** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
6499 representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
6500 representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
6501
6502 The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
6503 loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
6504 is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
6505
6506 *** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
6507 which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
6508
6509 *** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
6510 which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
6511
6512 *** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
6513 portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
6514 so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
6515 You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
6516
6517 *** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
6518 it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
6519
6520 *** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
6521 convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
6522 buffer or string being searched.
6523
6524 One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
6525 [...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
6526 searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
6527 searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
6528 obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
6529 you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
6530 expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
6531
6532 *** Structure of coding system changed.
6533
6534 All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
6535 by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
6536 which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
6537 as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
6538 vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
6539 your own alias name of a coding system by the function
6540 define-coding-system-alias.
6541
6542 The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
6543 the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
6544 access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
6545 pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
6546 character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
6547 safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
6548 'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
6549 `iso-8859-1'.
6550
6551 Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
6552 The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
6553 coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
6554 (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
6555
6556 Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
6557 also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
6558 are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
6559 the other character sets and read it back correctly.
6560
6561 *** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
6562 proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
6563 This function requires a user interaction.
6564
6565 *** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
6566 find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
6567 select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
6568 systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
6569 a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
6570 select-safe-coding-system.
6571
6572 *** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
6573 decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
6574 last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
6575 was done.
6576
6577 *** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
6578 used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
6579 coding systems used by some specific language environment.
6580
6581 *** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
6582 return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
6583 characters are found, they now return a list of single element
6584 `undecided' or its subsidiaries.
6585
6586 *** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
6587 coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
6588 coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
6589 converted.
6590
6591 *** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
6592 coding system for communicating with other X clients.
6593
6594 *** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
6595 character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
6596 character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
6597 each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
6598 either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
6599 range of characters.
6600
6601 *** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
6602 Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
6603
6604 *** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
6605 in the current buffer at position POS.
6606
6607 *** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
6608 input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
6609 function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
6610 character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
6611 event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
6612 binding input-method-function to nil.
6613
6614 The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
6615 method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
6616 input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
6617 the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
6618 not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
6619
6620 The input method function is not called when reading the second and
6621 subsequent events of a key sequence.
6622
6623 *** You can customize any language environment by using
6624 set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
6625
6626 The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
6627 customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
6628 instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
6629 environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
6630 exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
6631 \f
6632 * Changes in Emacs 20.1
6633
6634 ** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
6635 options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
6636 at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
6637 tree structure.
6638
6639 M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
6640 user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
6641
6642 With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
6643 session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
6644 in your .emacs file.)
6645
6646 ** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
6647 You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
6648
6649 ** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
6650 This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
6651
6652 ** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
6653 immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
6654 kills the region.
6655
6656 The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
6657 delete the character before point, as usual.
6658
6659 ** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
6660 on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
6661 by setting search-highlight to nil.)
6662
6663 ** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
6664 insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
6665 the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
6666 onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
6667 history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
6668 past.)
6669
6670 ** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
6671 This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
6672 in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
6673 TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
6674 makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
6675
6676 As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
6677 and is an alias for it.
6678
6679 If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
6680 use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
6681
6682 ** Scrolling changes
6683
6684 *** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
6685 position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
6686
6687 In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
6688 on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
6689 where it started.
6690
6691 *** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
6692 move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
6693 screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
6694 does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
6695
6696 *** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
6697 top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
6698 comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
6699 recenters the window.
6700
6701 ** International character set support (MULE)
6702
6703 Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
6704 including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
6705 Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
6706 Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
6707 features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
6708 MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
6709
6710 Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
6711 coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
6712 character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
6713 variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
6714 into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
6715
6716 Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
6717 generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
6718 supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
6719 language, to make it possible to type them.
6720
6721 The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
6722 character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
6723
6724 The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
6725 to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
6726
6727 You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
6728
6729 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
6730
6731 Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
6732 characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
6733 argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
6734 already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
6735 characters for their work until they want to change.
6736
6737 *** Input methods
6738
6739 An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
6740 specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
6741 has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
6742 the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
6743 support several input methods.
6744
6745 The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
6746 another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
6747 work.
6748
6749 A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
6750 characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
6751 composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
6752 consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
6753 sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
6754 letter.
6755
6756 The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
6757 by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
6758 First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
6759 marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
6760 mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
6761
6762 None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
6763 they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
6764 phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
6765 converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
6766
6767 Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
6768 word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
6769 typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
6770 the first guess is wrong.
6771
6772 *** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
6773 turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
6774
6775 If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
6776 byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
6777 they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
6778 the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
6779
6780 However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
6781 use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
6782 includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
6783 translate automatically to and from either one.
6784
6785 *** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
6786
6787 Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
6788 file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
6789 sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
6790 what you want.
6791
6792 If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
6793 example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
6794 system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
6795 multibyte characters in that buffer.
6796
6797 If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
6798 character conversion as well.
6799
6800 *** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
6801
6802 A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
6803 Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
6804 requires using many fonts.
6805
6806 Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
6807 collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
6808
6809 A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
6810 the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
6811 have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
6812 you would use a font.
6813
6814 If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
6815 specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
6816 display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
6817
6818 The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
6819 (that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
6820 characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height,
6821 or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped,
6822 and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil.
6823
6824 *** Defining fontsets.
6825
6826 Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
6827 chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
6828 with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
6829
6830 Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
6831 of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
6832 `fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
6833 standard fontset are created automatically.
6834
6835 If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
6836 argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
6837 FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
6838 with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
6839 name is `fontset-startup'.
6840
6841 Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
6842 The resource value should have this form:
6843 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
6844 FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
6845 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
6846 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
6847 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
6848 The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
6849 of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
6850 CHARSET-NAME should be the name of a character set, and FONT-NAME
6851 should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
6852
6853 Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
6854 last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
6855 You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
6856
6857 For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
6858 font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
6859 following resource,
6860 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
6861 the font for ASCII is generated as below:
6862 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
6863 Here is the substitution rule:
6864 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
6865 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
6866 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
6867 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
6868 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
6869
6870 The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
6871 fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
6872 that function explicitly to create a fontset.
6873
6874 With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
6875 like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
6876 name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
6877 fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
6878 fontsets.
6879
6880 *** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
6881 defaults for a particular choice of language.
6882
6883 Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
6884 method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
6885 visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
6886 already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
6887 language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
6888 system for new files that you create.
6889
6890 It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
6891 set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
6892 whole Emacs session.
6893
6894 For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
6895 chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
6896 with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
6897
6898 *** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
6899 specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
6900 specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
6901 the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
6902 coding systems that Emacs supports.
6903
6904 *** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
6905 lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
6906 This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
6907 After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
6908 is used for *the immediately following command*.
6909
6910 So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
6911 write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
6912
6913 If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
6914 then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
6915
6916 For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
6917 visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
6918
6919 *** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
6920 construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
6921 to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
6922 specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
6923 of the file.
6924
6925 *** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
6926 the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
6927 code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
6928 translated into that character code.
6929
6930 This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
6931 various countries to support the languages of those countries.
6932
6933 By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
6934
6935 *** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
6936 the coding system for keyboard input.
6937
6938 Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
6939 with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
6940 some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
6941
6942 By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
6943
6944 Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
6945 input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
6946 translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
6947 to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
6948 designed to work with terminals.
6949
6950 *** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
6951 specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
6952 This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
6953 has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
6954 translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
6955 in the corresponding buffer.
6956
6957 By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
6958
6959 *** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
6960 to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
6961 It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
6962
6963 *** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
6964 an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
6965 command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
6966 want to use.
6967
6968 C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
6969 method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
6970
6971 *** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
6972 layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
6973 remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
6974 which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
6975
6976 *** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
6977 the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
6978 related information.
6979
6980 *** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
6981 HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
6982 scripts.
6983
6984 *** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
6985 information about the support for a particular language.
6986 You specify the language as an argument.
6987
6988 *** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
6989 the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
6990 first dash.
6991
6992 A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
6993 (except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
6994 whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
6995 1 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
6996
6997 A alternativnyj (Russian)
6998 B big5 (Chinese)
6999 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
7000 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
7001 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
7002 E euc-japan (Japanese)
7003 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
7004 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
7005 K euc-korea (Korean)
7006 R koi8 (Russian)
7007 Q tibetan
7008 S shift_jis (Japanese)
7009 T lao
7010 T tis620 (Thai)
7011 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
7012 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
7013 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
7014 v viqr (Vietnamese)
7015 z hz (Chinese)
7016
7017 When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
7018 two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
7019 coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
7020 keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
7021
7022 *** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
7023 conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
7024
7025 When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
7026 into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
7027 rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
7028 Rmail files themselves.
7029
7030 *** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
7031 conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
7032
7033 Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
7034 for sending mail:
7035
7036 - If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
7037 - Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
7038 - Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
7039 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
7040 - Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
7041
7042 *** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
7043 to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
7044 Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
7045 translations.
7046
7047 ** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
7048 of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
7049 insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
7050 without any conversion.
7051
7052 ** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
7053 You can now specify any number of octal digits.
7054 RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
7055 any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
7056
7057 ** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
7058 functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
7059
7060 Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
7061 Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
7062
7063 Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
7064 mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
7065
7066 ** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
7067 complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
7068 in the buffer before point.
7069
7070 With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
7071 symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
7072 you are using.
7073
7074 With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
7075 just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
7076
7077 ** File locking works with NFS now.
7078
7079 The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
7080 in the same directory as FILENAME.
7081
7082 This means that collision detection between two different machines now
7083 works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
7084 can become a bottleneck.
7085
7086 The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
7087 does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
7088 create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
7089 file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
7090 rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
7091 so useful that the change is worth while.
7092
7093 When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
7094 are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
7095 collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
7096 tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
7097
7098 ** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
7099 it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
7100 show-paren-mode.
7101
7102 ** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
7103 selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
7104 delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
7105
7106 ** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
7107 within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
7108 complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
7109
7110 ** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
7111 it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
7112 set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
7113
7114 ** Changes in View mode.
7115
7116 *** Several new commands are available in View mode.
7117 Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
7118
7119 *** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
7120 view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
7121
7122 *** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
7123 previous state.
7124
7125 *** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
7126 scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
7127
7128 *** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
7129 non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
7130 not just the selected window.
7131
7132 *** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
7133 read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
7134 turns View mode on or off.
7135
7136 *** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
7137 how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
7138 delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
7139
7140 ** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
7141 now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
7142
7143 ** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
7144 has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
7145 presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
7146 which version to compare with.
7147
7148 ** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
7149 blocks if a match is inside the block.
7150
7151 The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
7152 is outside the block. By customizing the variable
7153 isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
7154 shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
7155
7156 By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
7157 of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
7158 blocks, all of them or none.
7159
7160 ** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
7161 current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
7162 confirmation first.
7163
7164 ** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
7165 now changes the major mode according to that file name.
7166 However, the mode will not be changed if
7167 (1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
7168 (2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
7169 not suitable for ordinary files, or
7170 (3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
7171
7172 This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
7173
7174 However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
7175 these commands do not change the major mode.
7176
7177 ** M-x occur changes.
7178
7179 *** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
7180 it performs a case-sensitive search.
7181
7182 *** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
7183 if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
7184 using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
7185
7186 ** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
7187 in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
7188 window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
7189 that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
7190 buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
7191
7192 ** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
7193 after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
7194 appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
7195 come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
7196
7197 ** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
7198 selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
7199 buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
7200
7201 ** Outline mode changes.
7202
7203 *** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
7204
7205 *** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
7206
7207 ** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
7208 you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
7209 Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
7210 was already active.
7211
7212 The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
7213 unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
7214 get confused by it.
7215
7216 If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
7217 set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
7218
7219 ** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
7220
7221 *** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
7222 conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
7223 character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
7224 including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
7225
7226 The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
7227 mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
7228 copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
7229
7230 *** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
7231 are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
7232 values.
7233
7234 `dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
7235 case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
7236 `dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
7237 case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
7238
7239 ** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
7240 certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
7241 can be. The default value is 30.
7242
7243 ** Changes in Mail mode.
7244
7245 *** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
7246 Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
7247 composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
7248 `mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
7249 `sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
7250 behavior.
7251
7252 C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
7253 compose-mail-other-frame.
7254
7255 *** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
7256 the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
7257 replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
7258 buffer that shows the original message.
7259
7260 *** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
7261 with separator lines around the contents.
7262
7263 *** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
7264 in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
7265 definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
7266 need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
7267
7268 *** New features in the mail-complete command.
7269
7270 **** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
7271 for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
7272 controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
7273 Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
7274
7275 **** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
7276 to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
7277 /etc/passwd.
7278
7279 **** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
7280 to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
7281 /etc/passwd.
7282
7283 ** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
7284 special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
7285 directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
7286 reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
7287
7288 Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
7289 when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
7290 be taken to be magic.
7291
7292 ** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
7293 files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
7294 available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
7295
7296 M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
7297 (-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
7298
7299 ** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
7300 suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
7301
7302 In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
7303
7304 new key dired.el binding old key
7305 ------- ---------------- -------
7306 * c dired-change-marks c
7307 * m dired-mark m
7308 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
7309 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
7310 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
7311 * u dired-unmark u
7312 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
7313 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-?
7314 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
7315 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
7316 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
7317 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
7318
7319 ** Rmail changes.
7320
7321 *** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
7322 saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
7323 chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
7324 each time you run it.
7325
7326 *** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
7327 whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
7328
7329 *** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
7330 messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
7331 means to move in the opposite direction.
7332
7333 *** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
7334 you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
7335
7336 *** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
7337 just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
7338 It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
7339 can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
7340 for output.
7341
7342 ** Gnus changes.
7343
7344 *** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
7345
7346 *** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
7347 Gnus.
7348
7349 *** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
7350 `and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
7351
7352 *** Article washing status can be displayed in the
7353 article mode line.
7354
7355 *** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
7356
7357 *** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
7358
7359 (setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
7360
7361 *** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
7362 are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
7363 `gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
7364
7365 *** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
7366
7367 *** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
7368
7369 *** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
7370 See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
7371
7372 *** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
7373 Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
7374 used to pick articles.
7375
7376 *** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
7377 another have been added.
7378
7379 `M-x gnus-change-server'
7380
7381 *** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
7382 generating lines in buffers.
7383
7384 *** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
7385 `M-C-_'.
7386
7387 *** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
7388
7389 *** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
7390
7391 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
7392
7393 *** Scores can be decayed.
7394
7395 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
7396
7397 *** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
7398 Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
7399
7400 *** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
7401 the native server.
7402
7403 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
7404
7405 *** A new command for reading collections of documents
7406 (nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'.
7407
7408 *** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
7409
7410 *** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
7411 even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
7412
7413 *** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
7414 (DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
7415
7416 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
7417 a group.
7418
7419 *** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
7420 sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
7421
7422 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
7423
7424 *** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
7425
7426 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
7427
7428 *** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
7429
7430 Use the `Y c' command.
7431
7432 *** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
7433
7434 *** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
7435
7436 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
7437
7438 *** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
7439 from incoming mail before saving the mail.
7440
7441 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
7442
7443 *** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
7444
7445 *** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
7446 the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
7447
7448 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
7449
7450 Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
7451 and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
7452 from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
7453 hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
7454 this issue.)
7455
7456 Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
7457 automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
7458 particular news group. This can be done by:
7459
7460 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
7461
7462 Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
7463 of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
7464 "XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
7465 system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
7466 for reading and posting).
7467
7468 CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
7469 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
7470 Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
7471 newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
7472 there.
7473
7474 Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
7475 default. Here are some of these default settings:
7476
7477 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
7478 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
7479 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
7480 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
7481 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
7482
7483 When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
7484 the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
7485
7486 ** CC mode changes.
7487
7488 *** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
7489 code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
7490 values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
7491 this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
7492 Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
7493 loaded.
7494
7495 If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
7496 Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
7497 style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
7498 share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
7499 c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
7500 must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
7501
7502 *** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
7503 of the current buffer.
7504
7505 *** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
7506 it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
7507 of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
7508
7509 *** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
7510 style that the Python developers like.
7511
7512 *** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
7513 This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
7514 just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
7515
7516 ** VC Changes [new]
7517
7518 *** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
7519 name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
7520 directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
7521
7522 This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
7523 master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
7524 developers.
7525
7526 You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
7527 RET in a buffer visiting that file.
7528
7529 *** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
7530 other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
7531 writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
7532 calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
7533
7534 *** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
7535 version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
7536
7537 ** Calendar changes.
7538
7539 *** A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or
7540 subclasses of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow
7541 you do this for the year of the selected date, or the
7542 following/previous years.
7543
7544 *** There is now support for the Baha'i calendar system. Use `pb' in
7545 the *Calendar* buffer to display the current Baha'i date. The Baha'i
7546 calendar, or "Badi calendar" is a system of 19 months with 19 days
7547 each, and 4 intercalary days (5 during a Gregorian leap year). The
7548 calendar begins May 23, 1844, with each of the months named after a
7549 supposed attribute of God.
7550
7551 ** ps-print changes
7552
7553 There are some new user variables and subgroups for customizing the page
7554 layout.
7555
7556 *** Headers & Footers (subgroup)
7557
7558 Some printer systems print a header page and force the first page to
7559 be printed on the back of the header page when using duplex. If your
7560 printer system has this behavior, set variable
7561 `ps-banner-page-when-duplexing' to t.
7562
7563 If variable `ps-banner-page-when-duplexing' is non-nil, it prints a
7564 blank page as the very first printed page. So, it behaves as if the
7565 very first character of buffer (or region) were a form feed ^L (\014).
7566
7567 The variable `ps-spool-config' specifies who is responsible for
7568 setting duplex mode and page size. Valid values are:
7569
7570 lpr-switches duplex and page size are configured by `ps-lpr-switches'.
7571 Don't forget to set `ps-lpr-switches' to select duplex
7572 printing for your printer.
7573
7574 setpagedevice duplex and page size are configured by ps-print using the
7575 setpagedevice PostScript operator.
7576
7577 nil duplex and page size are configured by ps-print *not* using
7578 the setpagedevice PostScript operator.
7579
7580 The variable `ps-spool-tumble' specifies how the page images on
7581 opposite sides of a sheet are oriented with respect to each other. If
7582 `ps-spool-tumble' is nil, ps-print produces output suitable for
7583 bindings on the left or right. If `ps-spool-tumble' is non-nil,
7584 ps-print produces output suitable for bindings at the top or bottom.
7585 This variable takes effect only if `ps-spool-duplex' is non-nil.
7586 The default value is nil.
7587
7588 The variable `ps-header-frame-alist' specifies a header frame
7589 properties alist. Valid frame properties are:
7590
7591 fore-color Specify the foreground frame color.
7592 Value should be a float number between 0.0 (black
7593 color) and 1.0 (white color), or a string which is a
7594 color name, or a list of 3 float numbers which
7595 correspond to the Red Green Blue color scale, each
7596 float number between 0.0 (dark color) and 1.0 (bright
7597 color). The default is 0 ("black").
7598
7599 back-color Specify the background frame color (similar to fore-color).
7600 The default is 0.9 ("gray90").
7601
7602 shadow-color Specify the shadow color (similar to fore-color).
7603 The default is 0 ("black").
7604
7605 border-color Specify the border color (similar to fore-color).
7606 The default is 0 ("black").
7607
7608 border-width Specify the border width.
7609 The default is 0.4.
7610
7611 Any other property is ignored.
7612
7613 Don't change this alist directly; instead use Custom, or the
7614 `ps-value', `ps-get', `ps-put' and `ps-del' functions (see there for
7615 documentation).
7616
7617 Ps-print can also print footers. The footer variables are:
7618 `ps-print-footer', `ps-footer-offset', `ps-print-footer-frame',
7619 `ps-footer-font-family', `ps-footer-font-size', `ps-footer-line-pad',
7620 `ps-footer-lines', `ps-left-footer', `ps-right-footer' and
7621 `ps-footer-frame-alist'. These variables are similar to those
7622 controlling headers.
7623
7624 *** Color management (subgroup)
7625
7626 If `ps-print-color-p' is non-nil, the buffer's text will be printed in
7627 color.
7628
7629 *** Face Management (subgroup)
7630
7631 If you need to print without worrying about face background colors,
7632 set the variable `ps-use-face-background' which specifies if face
7633 background should be used. Valid values are:
7634
7635 t always use face background color.
7636 nil never use face background color.
7637 (face...) list of faces whose background color will be used.
7638
7639 *** N-up printing (subgroup)
7640
7641 The variable `ps-n-up-printing' specifies the number of pages per
7642 sheet of paper.
7643
7644 The variable `ps-n-up-margin' specifies the margin in points (pt)
7645 between the sheet border and the n-up printing.
7646
7647 If variable `ps-n-up-border-p' is non-nil, a border is drawn around
7648 each page.
7649
7650 The variable `ps-n-up-filling' specifies how the page matrix is filled
7651 on each sheet of paper. Following are the valid values for
7652 `ps-n-up-filling' with a filling example using a 3x4 page matrix:
7653
7654 `left-top' 1 2 3 4 `left-bottom' 9 10 11 12
7655 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8
7656 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
7657
7658 `right-top' 4 3 2 1 `right-bottom' 12 11 10 9
7659 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5
7660 12 11 10 9 4 3 2 1
7661
7662 `top-left' 1 4 7 10 `bottom-left' 3 6 9 12
7663 2 5 8 11 2 5 8 11
7664 3 6 9 12 1 4 7 10
7665
7666 `top-right' 10 7 4 1 `bottom-right' 12 9 6 3
7667 11 8 5 2 11 8 5 2
7668 12 9 6 3 10 7 4 1
7669
7670 Any other value is treated as `left-top'.
7671
7672 *** Zebra stripes (subgroup)
7673
7674 The variable `ps-zebra-color' controls the zebra stripes grayscale or
7675 RGB color.
7676
7677 The variable `ps-zebra-stripe-follow' specifies how zebra stripes
7678 continue on next page. Visually, valid values are (the character `+'
7679 to the right of each column indicates that a line is printed):
7680
7681 `nil' `follow' `full' `full-follow'
7682 Current Page -------- ----------- --------- ----------------
7683 1 XXXXX + 1 XXXXXXXX + 1 XXXXXX + 1 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
7684 2 XXXXX + 2 XXXXXXXX + 2 XXXXXX + 2 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
7685 3 XXXXX + 3 XXXXXXXX + 3 XXXXXX + 3 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
7686 4 + 4 + 4 + 4 +
7687 5 + 5 + 5 + 5 +
7688 6 + 6 + 6 + 6 +
7689 7 XXXXX + 7 XXXXXXXX + 7 XXXXXX + 7 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
7690 8 XXXXX + 8 XXXXXXXX + 8 XXXXXX + 8 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
7691 9 XXXXX + 9 XXXXXXXX + 9 XXXXXX + 9 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
7692 10 + 10 +
7693 11 + 11 +
7694 -------- ----------- --------- ----------------
7695 Next Page -------- ----------- --------- ----------------
7696 12 XXXXX + 12 + 10 XXXXXX + 10 +
7697 13 XXXXX + 13 XXXXXXXX + 11 XXXXXX + 11 +
7698 14 XXXXX + 14 XXXXXXXX + 12 XXXXXX + 12 +
7699 15 + 15 XXXXXXXX + 13 + 13 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
7700 16 + 16 + 14 + 14 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
7701 17 + 17 + 15 + 15 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
7702 18 XXXXX + 18 + 16 XXXXXX + 16 +
7703 19 XXXXX + 19 XXXXXXXX + 17 XXXXXX + 17 +
7704 20 XXXXX + 20 XXXXXXXX + 18 XXXXXX + 18 +
7705 21 + 21 XXXXXXXX +
7706 22 + 22 +
7707 -------- ----------- --------- ----------------
7708
7709 Any other value is treated as `nil'.
7710
7711
7712 *** Printer management (subgroup)
7713
7714 The variable `ps-printer-name-option' determines the option used by
7715 some utilities to indicate the printer name; it's used only when
7716 `ps-printer-name' is a non-empty string. If you're using the lpr
7717 utility to print, for example, `ps-printer-name-option' should be set
7718 to "-P".
7719
7720 The variable `ps-manual-feed' indicates if the printer requires manual
7721 paper feeding. If it's nil, automatic feeding takes place. If it's
7722 non-nil, manual feeding takes place.
7723
7724 The variable `ps-end-with-control-d' specifies whether C-d (\x04)
7725 should be inserted at end of the generated PostScript. Non-nil means
7726 do so.
7727
7728 *** Page settings (subgroup)
7729
7730 If variable `ps-warn-paper-type' is nil, it's *not* treated as an
7731 error if the PostScript printer doesn't have a paper with the size
7732 indicated by `ps-paper-type'; the default paper size will be used
7733 instead. If `ps-warn-paper-type' is non-nil, an error is signaled if
7734 the PostScript printer doesn't support a paper with the size indicated
7735 by `ps-paper-type'. This is used when `ps-spool-config' is set to
7736 `setpagedevice'.
7737
7738 The variable `ps-print-upside-down' determines the orientation for
7739 printing pages: nil means `normal' printing, non-nil means
7740 `upside-down' printing (that is, the page is rotated by 180 degrees).
7741
7742 The variable `ps-selected-pages' specifies which pages to print. If
7743 it's nil, all pages are printed. If it's a list, list elements may be
7744 integers specifying a single page to print, or cons cells (FROM . TO)
7745 specifying to print from page FROM to TO. Invalid list elements, that
7746 is integers smaller than one, or elements whose FROM is greater than
7747 its TO, are ignored.
7748
7749 The variable `ps-even-or-odd-pages' specifies how to print even/odd
7750 pages. Valid values are:
7751
7752 nil print all pages.
7753
7754 `even-page' print only even pages.
7755
7756 `odd-page' print only odd pages.
7757
7758 `even-sheet' print only even sheets.
7759 That is, if `ps-n-up-printing' is 1, it behaves like
7760 `even-page', but for values greater than 1, it'll
7761 print only the even sheet of paper.
7762
7763 `odd-sheet' print only odd sheets.
7764 That is, if `ps-n-up-printing' is 1, it behaves like
7765 `odd-page'; but for values greater than 1, it'll print
7766 only the odd sheet of paper.
7767
7768 Any other value is treated as nil.
7769
7770 If you set `ps-selected-pages' (see there for documentation), pages
7771 are filtered by `ps-selected-pages', and then by
7772 `ps-even-or-odd-pages'. For example, if we have:
7773
7774 (setq ps-selected-pages '(1 4 (6 . 10) (12 . 16) 20))
7775
7776 and we combine this with `ps-even-or-odd-pages' and
7777 `ps-n-up-printing', we get:
7778
7779 `ps-n-up-printing' = 1:
7780 `ps-even-or-odd-pages' PAGES PRINTED
7781 nil 1, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 20
7782 even-page 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 20
7783 odd-page 1, 7, 9, 13, 15
7784 even-sheet 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 20
7785 odd-sheet 1, 7, 9, 13, 15
7786
7787 `ps-n-up-printing' = 2:
7788 `ps-even-or-odd-pages' PAGES PRINTED
7789 nil 1/4, 6/7, 8/9, 10/12, 13/14, 15/16, 20
7790 even-page 4/6, 8/10, 12/14, 16/20
7791 odd-page 1/7, 9/13, 15
7792 even-sheet 6/7, 10/12, 15/16
7793 odd-sheet 1/4, 8/9, 13/14, 20
7794
7795 *** Miscellany (subgroup)
7796
7797 The variable `ps-error-handler-message' specifies where error handler
7798 messages should be sent.
7799
7800 It is also possible to add a user-defined PostScript prologue code in
7801 front of all generated prologue code by setting the variable
7802 `ps-user-defined-prologue'.
7803
7804 The variable `ps-line-number-font' specifies the font for line numbers.
7805
7806 The variable `ps-line-number-font-size' specifies the font size in
7807 points for line numbers.
7808
7809 The variable `ps-line-number-color' specifies the color for line
7810 numbers. See `ps-zebra-color' for documentation.
7811
7812 The variable `ps-line-number-step' specifies the interval in which
7813 line numbers are printed. For example, if `ps-line-number-step' is set
7814 to 2, the printing will look like:
7815
7816 1 one line
7817 one line
7818 3 one line
7819 one line
7820 5 one line
7821 one line
7822 ...
7823
7824 Valid values are:
7825
7826 integer an integer specifying the interval in which line numbers are
7827 printed. If it's smaller than or equal to zero, 1
7828 is used.
7829
7830 `zebra' specifies that only the line number of the first line in a
7831 zebra stripe is to be printed.
7832
7833 Any other value is treated as `zebra'.
7834
7835 The variable `ps-line-number-start' specifies the starting point in
7836 the interval given by `ps-line-number-step'. For example, if
7837 `ps-line-number-step' is set to 3, and `ps-line-number-start' is set to
7838 3, the output will look like:
7839
7840 one line
7841 one line
7842 3 one line
7843 one line
7844 one line
7845 6 one line
7846 one line
7847 one line
7848 9 one line
7849 one line
7850 ...
7851
7852 The variable `ps-postscript-code-directory' specifies the directory
7853 where the PostScript prologue file used by ps-print is found.
7854
7855 The variable `ps-line-spacing' determines the line spacing in points,
7856 for ordinary text, when generating PostScript (similar to
7857 `ps-font-size').
7858
7859 The variable `ps-paragraph-spacing' determines the paragraph spacing,
7860 in points, for ordinary text, when generating PostScript (similar to
7861 `ps-font-size').
7862
7863 The variable `ps-paragraph-regexp' specifies the paragraph delimiter.
7864
7865 The variable `ps-begin-cut-regexp' and `ps-end-cut-regexp' specify the
7866 start and end of a region to cut out when printing.
7867
7868 ** hideshow changes.
7869
7870 *** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
7871 C++, ; for lisp).
7872
7873 *** Support for java-mode added.
7874
7875 *** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
7876 in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
7877
7878 *** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the comments at
7879 the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
7880 way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
7881
7882 *** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
7883 robust and a lot faster.
7884
7885 *** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
7886
7887 *** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
7888 to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
7889 documentation for more details.
7890
7891 ** Changes in Enriched mode.
7892
7893 *** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
7894 filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
7895 of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
7896 use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
7897 the next time unless the fill-column is different.
7898
7899 *** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
7900 distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
7901 as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
7902 as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
7903
7904 ** Font Lock mode
7905
7906 *** Custom support
7907
7908 The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
7909 font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
7910 faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
7911 group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
7912 your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
7913 consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
7914
7915 You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
7916
7917 *** Maximum decoration
7918
7919 Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
7920 default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
7921 of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
7922 supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
7923 to get the old behavior.
7924
7925 *** New support
7926
7927 Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
7928
7929 Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
7930 support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
7931
7932 *** Configurable support
7933
7934 Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
7935 additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
7936 c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
7937 java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
7938 list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
7939 of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
7940 convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
7941
7942 Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
7943 way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
7944 it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
7945
7946 *** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
7947
7948 You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
7949 highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
7950 for any mode.
7951
7952 For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
7953
7954 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
7955
7956 in your ~/.emacs.
7957
7958 *** New faces
7959
7960 Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
7961 font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
7962 distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
7963 to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
7964
7965 *** Changes to fast-lock support mode
7966
7967 The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
7968 cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
7969 same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
7970
7971 *** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
7972
7973 The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
7974 according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
7975 the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
7976 non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
7977 refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
7978 the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
7979 Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode.
7980
7981 This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
7982 For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
7983 this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
7984 refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
7985 containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
7986 the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
7987
7988 As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
7989
7990 Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
7991 Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
7992 Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
7993 new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
7994
7995 If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
7996 settings.
7997
7998 ** Ada mode changes.
7999
8000 *** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
8001 If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
8002 procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
8003 you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
8004 stubs.
8005
8006 *** There are two new commands:
8007 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
8008 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
8009
8010 The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
8011 `ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
8012 `ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
8013
8014 *** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
8015 is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
8016 Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
8017
8018 *** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
8019 formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
8020 places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
8021 space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
8022
8023 ** Scheme mode changes.
8024
8025 *** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
8026 mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
8027 for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
8028 with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
8029 have any effect.
8030
8031 If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
8032 still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
8033 scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
8034 variables as buffer-local variables.
8035
8036 *** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
8037 Use M-x dsssl-mode.
8038
8039 ** Changes to the emacsclient program
8040
8041 *** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
8042 USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
8043 associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
8044 can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
8045
8046 *** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
8047 it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
8048 buffer in Emacs.
8049
8050 *** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
8051 use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
8052 ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
8053 option takes precedence.
8054
8055 ** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
8056 constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
8057 (in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
8058
8059 ** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
8060 which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
8061 the current defun.
8062
8063 ** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
8064 following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
8065
8066 ** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
8067 and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
8068 necessary).
8069
8070 ** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
8071 if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
8072 these register values no longer become completely useless.
8073 If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
8074 asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
8075 it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
8076
8077 ** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
8078 example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
8079 be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
8080 you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
8081
8082 You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
8083 variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
8084 file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
8085 revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
8086 only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
8087
8088 ** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
8089 since it applies only to the current frame.
8090
8091 ** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
8092 file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
8093 and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
8094
8095 This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
8096 multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
8097 variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
8098 tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
8099 instead of just the file you are editing.
8100
8101 ** RefTeX mode
8102
8103 RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
8104 and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
8105 different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
8106 multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
8107 turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
8108
8109 C-c ( reftex-label
8110 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
8111 knows which kind of label is needed.
8112
8113 C-c ) reftex-reference
8114 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
8115 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
8116
8117 C-c [ reftex-citation
8118 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
8119 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
8120
8121 C-c & reftex-view-crossref
8122 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
8123
8124 C-c = reftex-toc
8125 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
8126 can quickly jump to every section.
8127
8128 Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
8129 commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
8130 Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
8131 reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
8132 C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
8133
8134 ** Changes in BibTeX mode.
8135
8136 *** Info documentation is now available.
8137
8138 *** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
8139 both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
8140
8141 *** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
8142 bibtex-user-optional-fields.
8143
8144 *** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
8145 (use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
8146
8147 *** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
8148 entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
8149 appropriate functions.
8150
8151 *** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
8152 entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h.
8153
8154 *** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
8155 been cleaned.
8156
8157 *** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
8158 bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
8159
8160 *** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
8161 shall be delimited.
8162
8163 *** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
8164 bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
8165 bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
8166
8167 *** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
8168 field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
8169 prefixed with `ALT'.
8170
8171 *** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
8172 bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
8173 formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
8174 documentation).
8175
8176 *** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
8177 documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
8178 for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
8179
8180 *** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
8181 comma should be inserted at end of last field.
8182
8183 *** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
8184 alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
8185 signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
8186
8187 *** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
8188
8189 *** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
8190
8191 *** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
8192 from alien sources.
8193
8194 *** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
8195 to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
8196 crossref entries.
8197
8198 *** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
8199 region.
8200
8201 *** Added support for imenu.
8202
8203 *** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
8204 of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
8205 `compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
8206 `next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
8207
8208 *** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
8209 from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
8210
8211 ** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
8212
8213 ** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
8214
8215 ** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
8216 functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
8217 Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
8218 as an argument.
8219
8220 When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
8221 and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
8222
8223 ** browse-url changes
8224
8225 *** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
8226 Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
8227 (browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
8228 non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
8229 customization variables.
8230
8231 *** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
8232
8233 *** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
8234 lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
8235 (e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
8236
8237 ** Changes in Ediff
8238
8239 *** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
8240 pops up the Info file for this command.
8241
8242 *** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
8243 the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
8244 merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
8245 directories).
8246
8247 *** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
8248 and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
8249 files in the same directory.
8250
8251 *** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
8252 The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
8253 related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
8254
8255 ** Changes in Viper
8256
8257 *** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
8258 *** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
8259 instead of vip-.
8260 *** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
8261 *** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
8262 Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
8263 *** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
8264 *** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
8265 *** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
8266 color when Viper is in insert state.
8267 *** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
8268 Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
8269 viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
8270
8271 ** Etags changes.
8272
8273 *** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
8274 default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
8275 Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
8276 variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
8277 not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
8278
8279 *** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
8280
8281 *** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
8282 constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
8283
8284 *** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
8285 recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
8286 In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
8287
8288 *** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
8289 C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
8290 recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
8291 methods and protocols.
8292
8293 *** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
8294 .cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
8295 column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
8296 paragraph name.
8297
8298 *** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
8299 an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
8300 at least M times and as many as N times.
8301
8302 ** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
8303 in files has changed slightly.
8304
8305 With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
8306 time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
8307 This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
8308 with old time-stamp-format values.
8309
8310 In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
8311 (`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
8312 This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
8313 reasons.
8314
8315 In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
8316 natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
8317 fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
8318 (`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
8319 time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
8320 specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
8321
8322 Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
8323 case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
8324 truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
8325
8326 The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
8327 being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
8328 future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
8329 recommended now will continue to work then.
8330
8331 See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
8332 details.
8333
8334 ** There are some additional major modes:
8335
8336 dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
8337 m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
8338 meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
8339
8340 ** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
8341 copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
8342 into Emacs.
8343
8344 ** New Lisp packages include:
8345
8346 *** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
8347
8348 *** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
8349 be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
8350
8351 *** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
8352
8353 *** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
8354 in shell buffers.
8355
8356 *** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
8357 See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
8358 and `elint-defun'.
8359
8360 *** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
8361 meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
8362 ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
8363 strings or comments.
8364
8365 These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
8366 abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
8367 you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
8368 insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
8369 at these points.
8370
8371 *** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
8372 can visit them by short forms of their names.
8373
8374 *** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
8375 Emacs Lisp function at point.
8376
8377 *** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
8378
8379 *** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
8380 switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
8381
8382 *** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
8383
8384 *** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
8385
8386 *** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
8387
8388 *** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
8389 from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
8390
8391 *** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
8392 You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
8393 inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
8394 original place after inserting the copy.
8395
8396 *** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
8397 on the buffer.
8398
8399 You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
8400 velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
8401 (with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
8402
8403 Enable mouse-drag with:
8404 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
8405 -or-
8406 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
8407
8408 *** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
8409 mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
8410
8411 *** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
8412 It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
8413
8414 *** ogonek
8415
8416 The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
8417 Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
8418 platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
8419 TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
8420 ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
8421 prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
8422 instance) and vice versa.
8423
8424 To use this package load it using
8425 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
8426 Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
8427 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
8428 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
8429 The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
8430 ways of customization in `.emacs'.
8431
8432 *** Interface to ph.
8433
8434 Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
8435
8436 The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
8437 services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
8438 these servers.
8439
8440 *** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
8441
8442 *** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
8443 You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
8444 while the real cursor does not move.
8445
8446 *** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
8447 for visiting your favorite web sites.
8448
8449 *** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
8450 so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
8451
8452 ** movemail change
8453
8454 Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
8455 mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
8456 supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
8457 user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
8458
8459 This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
8460 \f
8461 * Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
8462
8463 ** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
8464
8465 Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
8466 end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
8467 Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
8468 file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
8469 file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
8470
8471 To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
8472 C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
8473 coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
8474 specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
8475 LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
8476 save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
8477 \f
8478 * Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
8479
8480 ** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
8481 Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
8482 vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
8483 Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
8484
8485 ** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
8486 to start with w32- instead of win32-.
8487
8488 In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
8489 don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
8490 "win".
8491
8492 ** Basic Lisp changes
8493
8494 *** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
8495 evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
8496
8497 *** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
8498 be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
8499 or by the user.
8500
8501 The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
8502
8503 *** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
8504
8505 (when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
8506 (unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
8507
8508 *** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
8509 usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
8510 its argument.
8511
8512 *** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
8513
8514 *** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
8515
8516 *** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
8517
8518 *** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
8519 error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
8520 include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
8521 `format' function.
8522
8523 *** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
8524 or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
8525 whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
8526
8527 *** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
8528 either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
8529 adding one of these suffixes.
8530
8531 *** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
8532 which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
8533 If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
8534
8535 We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
8536 because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
8537
8538 *** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
8539
8540 *** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
8541 You must load the `cl' library to define it.
8542
8543 *** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
8544 conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
8545
8546 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
8547
8548 BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
8549 BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
8550
8551 *** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
8552 choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
8553 restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
8554 works using `save-current-buffer'.
8555
8556 *** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
8557 write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
8558 of the last form.
8559
8560 *** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
8561 which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
8562 last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
8563 as the last form.
8564
8565 *** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
8566 characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
8567 matches.
8568
8569 For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
8570
8571 *** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
8572 with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
8573 Then it returns that string.
8574
8575 For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
8576
8577 (with-output-to-string
8578 (princ "The buffer is ")
8579 (princ (buffer-name)))
8580
8581 returns "The buffer is foo".
8582
8583 ** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
8584 is non-nil.
8585
8586 These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
8587 buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
8588 characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
8589
8590 *** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
8591 a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
8592
8593 Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
8594 character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
8595 Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
8596 position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
8597 characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
8598 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
8599
8600 ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
8601 Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
8602 non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
8603 characters".
8604
8605 The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
8606 through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
8607 "leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
8608 range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
8609 leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
8610
8611 *** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
8612 (forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
8613 multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
8614 character, which may be more than one buffer position.
8615
8616 This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
8617 always one buffer position, need to be changed.
8618
8619 However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
8620
8621 *** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
8622 because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
8623 have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
8624 the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
8625 guaranteed.
8626
8627 *** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
8628 between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
8629 character).
8630
8631 When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
8632
8633 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
8634 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
8635 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
8636 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
8637 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
8638
8639 *** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
8640
8641 *** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
8642 `length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
8643 more than the number of characters.
8644
8645 You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
8646 it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
8647 \xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
8648 is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
8649 follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
8650 newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
8651
8652 *** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
8653 and returns a string containing those characters.
8654
8655 *** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
8656 (sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
8657 counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
8658 character, sref signals an error.
8659
8660 *** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
8661 in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
8662 string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
8663
8664 *** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
8665 in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
8666 region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
8667
8668 *** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
8669 the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
8670 to a vector of the characters in it.
8671
8672 *** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
8673 of a string. You call it as follows:
8674
8675 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
8676
8677 This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
8678 STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
8679 This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
8680 Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
8681 it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
8682
8683 *** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
8684 if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
8685
8686 *** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
8687 if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
8688
8689 *** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
8690 to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
8691 not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
8692 which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
8693
8694 (truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
8695
8696 This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
8697
8698 The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
8699 If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
8700 are not included in the resulting value.
8701
8702 The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
8703 at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
8704 WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
8705 is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
8706
8707 If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
8708 place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
8709 character extends across that column), then the padding character
8710 PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
8711 string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
8712 column START-COLUMN.
8713
8714 *** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
8715 the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
8716 necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
8717 difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
8718 changed text, before the change.
8719
8720 *** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
8721 sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
8722 one character set for each script, not for each language.
8723
8724 **** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
8725
8726 **** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
8727
8728 **** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
8729 set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
8730
8731 **** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
8732 name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
8733 which identify the character within that character set.
8734
8735 **** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
8736 byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
8737 opposite of split-char.
8738
8739 **** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
8740 of all the characters between BEG and END.
8741
8742 **** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
8743 of all the characters in a string.
8744
8745 *** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
8746 and specifying coding systems.
8747
8748 **** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
8749 system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
8750 of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
8751 (Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
8752 and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
8753 as what to do about code conversion.)
8754
8755 **** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
8756 name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
8757
8758 **** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
8759 for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
8760 except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
8761
8762 Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
8763 which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
8764 to match against a file name.
8765
8766 VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
8767 a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
8768 decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
8769 to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
8770 systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
8771 specifies the coding system for encoding.
8772
8773 If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
8774 or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
8775
8776 **** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
8777 the coding system to use for network sockets.
8778
8779 Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
8780 which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
8781 either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
8782 service names.
8783
8784 VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
8785 a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
8786 decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
8787 to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
8788 systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
8789 specifies the coding system for encoding.
8790
8791 If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
8792 or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
8793
8794 **** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
8795 for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
8796 except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
8797 start the subprocess.
8798
8799 **** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
8800 systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
8801 when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
8802 (OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
8803 to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
8804
8805 **** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
8806 coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
8807 subprocess.
8808
8809 It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
8810 but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
8811 start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
8812 connection permanently or until overridden.
8813
8814 The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
8815 file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
8816 network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
8817 coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
8818 It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
8819 system for one operation at a time.
8820
8821 **** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
8822 files, subprocesses or network connections.
8823
8824 **** The function process-coding-system tells you what
8825 coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
8826 The value is a cons cell,
8827 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
8828 where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
8829 the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
8830 input to the subprocess.
8831
8832 **** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
8833 change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
8834
8835 ** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
8836 customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
8837 you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
8838
8839 You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
8840 variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
8841 information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
8842 legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
8843 customization.
8844
8845 Thus, instead of writing
8846
8847 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
8848 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
8849
8850 you would now write this:
8851
8852 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
8853 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
8854 :type 'boolean
8855 :group foo)
8856
8857 The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
8858 two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
8859 describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
8860 for a description of them.
8861
8862 The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
8863 should belong to. You define a new group like this:
8864
8865 (defgroup ispell nil
8866 "Spell checking using Ispell."
8867 :group 'processes)
8868
8869 The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
8870 group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
8871 but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
8872 to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
8873 second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
8874
8875 Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
8876 package should have just one group; a more complex package should
8877 have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
8878 package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
8879 first-level subgroups.
8880
8881 ** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
8882
8883 This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
8884 separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
8885
8886 ** easy-mmode
8887
8888 The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
8889 developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
8890 only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
8891 predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
8892 `easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
8893 `easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
8894
8895 ** Text property changes
8896
8897 *** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
8898 text property.
8899
8900 *** The new functions next-char-property-change and
8901 previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
8902 place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
8903 functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
8904 starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
8905
8906 If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
8907 LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
8908 of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
8909 position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
8910
8911 *** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
8912 value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
8913 is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
8914
8915 ** Changes in invisibility features
8916
8917 *** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
8918 hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
8919 is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
8920 should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
8921 would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
8922 make the overlay visible.
8923
8924 During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
8925 invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
8926 needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
8927 which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
8928 the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
8929 t when it should hide it.
8930
8931 *** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
8932
8933 Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
8934 invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
8935 and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
8936 Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
8937 manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
8938 Here is an example of how to do this:
8939
8940 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
8941 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
8942 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
8943 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
8944
8945 ...
8946 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
8947
8948 ...
8949 ;; When done with the overlays:
8950 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
8951 ;; Or respectively:
8952 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
8953
8954 ** Changes in syntax parsing.
8955
8956 *** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
8957 `parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
8958 obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
8959 `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
8960
8961 If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
8962 is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
8963 used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
8964
8965 When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
8966 character in the buffer is calculated thus:
8967
8968 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
8969 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
8970
8971 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
8972 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
8973 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
8974
8975 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
8976 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
8977 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
8978 determine the syntax type of the character.
8979
8980 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
8981 of the current buffer.
8982
8983 *** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
8984 value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
8985 for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
8986
8987 *** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
8988 and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
8989 only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
8990 character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
8991 another character with the same code (unless quoted).
8992
8993 These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
8994 text property.
8995
8996 *** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
8997 arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
8998 of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
8999
9000 *** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
9001 (and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
9002 element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
9003 nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
9004 string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
9005
9006 *** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
9007 syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
9008 `font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
9009
9010 ** Changes in face features
9011
9012 *** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
9013 if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
9014
9015 *** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
9016 of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
9017
9018 *** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
9019 set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
9020
9021 *** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
9022 set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
9023
9024 *** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
9025 by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
9026 and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
9027 the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
9028 overlay property).
9029
9030 This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
9031 arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
9032
9033 ** Changes in file-handling functions
9034
9035 *** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
9036 directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
9037 they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
9038 is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
9039
9040 This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
9041 begins with ~.
9042
9043 *** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
9044 it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
9045
9046 *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
9047 the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
9048
9049 *** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
9050 as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
9051
9052 *** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
9053 character code conversion as well as other things.
9054
9055 Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
9056 (formerly it did not).
9057
9058 *** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
9059 environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
9060
9061 *** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
9062 instead of constant strings.
9063
9064 *** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
9065 to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
9066 any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
9067
9068 substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
9069 in the same way as before.
9070
9071 *** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
9072 The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
9073 which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
9074
9075 *** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
9076 error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
9077 else, and returns nil.
9078
9079 *** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
9080 directory cannot be listed.
9081
9082 ** Changes in minibuffer input
9083
9084 *** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
9085 read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
9086 additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
9087 argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
9088 ways:
9089
9090 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
9091 It is available through the history command M-n.
9092
9093 *** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
9094 read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
9095 argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
9096 minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
9097 enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
9098
9099 In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
9100 argument in this way.
9101
9102 *** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
9103 from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
9104 minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
9105
9106 ** Echo area features
9107
9108 *** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
9109 echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
9110 minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
9111 after the echo area is cleared.
9112
9113 *** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
9114 in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
9115
9116 ** Keyboard input features
9117
9118 *** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
9119 set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
9120
9121 *** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
9122 received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
9123 by keyboard macros.
9124
9125 ** Frame-related changes
9126
9127 *** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
9128 creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
9129 hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
9130
9131 *** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
9132 the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
9133 has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
9134
9135 *** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
9136 selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
9137 value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
9138 in the selected frame.
9139
9140 *** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
9141 is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
9142 which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
9143
9144 ** X Windows features
9145
9146 *** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
9147 x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
9148 x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
9149
9150 *** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
9151 The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
9152
9153 *** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
9154 MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
9155 A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
9156
9157 If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
9158 it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
9159
9160 ** Subprocess features
9161
9162 *** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
9163 functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
9164 automatically.
9165
9166 *** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
9167 and returns the output from the command as a string.
9168
9169 *** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
9170 and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
9171
9172 ** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
9173 does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
9174
9175 ** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
9176 at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
9177 goes after the other menu items.
9178
9179 ** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
9180 of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
9181 around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
9182 are in use.
9183
9184 The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
9185 series of several changes--if that seems safe.
9186
9187 Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
9188 after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
9189 form.
9190
9191 ** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
9192 is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
9193 but its hook is still run.
9194
9195 ** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
9196 for errors that are handled by condition-case.
9197
9198 If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
9199 regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
9200 useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
9201
9202 This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
9203 are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
9204 filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
9205 warned.
9206
9207 ** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
9208 way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
9209
9210 ** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
9211 integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
9212 functions like display-time.
9213
9214 ** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
9215 name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
9216
9217 ** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
9218 can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
9219 is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
9220
9221 ** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
9222 if there is an error in compilation.
9223
9224 ** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
9225 switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
9226 argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
9227 they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
9228
9229 ** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
9230 Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
9231 the *scratch* buffer.
9232
9233 ** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
9234 The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
9235 where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
9236 e.g., in Font Lock mode.
9237
9238 ** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
9239 and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
9240 It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
9241
9242 ** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
9243 using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
9244 variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
9245 and compose-mail-other-frame.
9246
9247 ** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
9248 can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
9249 full name of the specified user will be returned.
9250
9251 ** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
9252 of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
9253 where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
9254 in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
9255 option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
9256 files at all.
9257
9258 ** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
9259 and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
9260 width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
9261 the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
9262
9263 For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
9264 minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
9265 with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
9266 is how %S normally pads to two positions.
9267
9268 ** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
9269
9270 ** imenu.el changes.
9271
9272 You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
9273 item from menu created by imenu.
9274
9275 An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
9276 #include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
9277 select one of those items.
9278 \f
9279 * For older news, see the file ONEWS
9280
9281 ----------------------------------------------------------------------
9282 Copyright information:
9283
9284 Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
9285
9286 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
9287 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
9288 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
9289 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
9290
9291 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
9292 of this document, or of portions of it,
9293 under the above conditions, provided also that they
9294 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
9295 \f
9296 Local variables:
9297 mode: outline
9298 paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$"
9299 end: